MODEL: BP-70M75 BP-70M90 DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM User's Manual Click to go to chapter index BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Functions of the machine and procedures for placing originals and loading paper OPERATION OF THE MACHINE Operation of the touch screen and customisation of the user interface COPIER Using the copy function PRINTER FACSIMILE SCANNER/INTERNET FAX Using the printer function Using the fax function Using the scan / Internet fax function DOCUMENT FILING Storing jobs as files on t
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view. The following explanation assumes that Adobe Reader is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default state.). (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (4) Return to top page button (2) (5) Back one page button Title button Displays the page of the title indicated by the button. Displays the previous page. (3) Return to previously displayed page button Displays the page that was displayed before the current page.
ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL This manual explains how to use the BP-70M75/BP-70M90 digital multifunctional system. Please note • For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide. • For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function. • The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows® 10.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PERIPHERAL DEVICES PART NAMES AND FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 SIDE AND BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PART NAMES AND FUNCTION EXTERIOR (2) (1) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (3) (4) (9) (10) Output tray (exit tray cabinet)*1 (7) (11)(12) (6) Received faxes and printed papers are delivered to this tray. Automatic document feeder It automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned at one time.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE (13) (19) (20) (21) (22) (14) (16) (17) (18) (23) (24) (13) Saddle Stitch Finisher (large stacker)* (19) Finisher (large stacker)* This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. ► SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) (page 1-59) This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE INTERIOR (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (6) (8) Main power switch A service technician collects replaced Toner collection container. Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when removing a misfeed. (4) Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (1) Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original. (2) Document feeding cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed. This cover is also opened to clean the paper feed roller. ► CLEANING THE PAPER FEED ROLLER (page 1-77) (3) Original guides These guides help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE SIDE AND BACK (1) Facsimile expansion kit (Option) (4) (5) (2) (6) (3) (7) (1) (4) [Power] button (2) External phone socket (TEL)* (5) When the fax function of the machine is used, an external phone can be connected to this socket. (3) USB port (B type) The machine does not use this connector. (6) Telephone line socket (LINE)* USB port (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE OPERATION PANEL This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel. (1) (2) (1) Information indicator This indicator illuminates when the power to the machine is turned on, and when a user logs in to the machine. ► INFORMATION INDICATOR (page 1-8) (2) Touch panel (3) (4) (5) (3) Main power indicator This indicator lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the “ ” position.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE INFORMATION INDICATOR When turning the machine power ON/OFF; at user authentication when the user has logged in using IC card or NFC; when connecting USB memory to the machine; when starting a job on the machine control panel; or during image adjustment or when adding toner; a fax is being received or an error has occurred in the machine, the LED lights blue, white and orange in response to the request/operation from the user to communicate to the user the
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Lighting pattern 3 Lights come on in succession, from the left lamp to the right lamp. If there are multiple lighting patterns for the information indicator, then that which is later has priority. The previous information indicator lighting pattern turns off, then the information indicator lights in accordance with the later generated lighting pattern.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE TURNING ON THE POWER This section describes how to turn on/off the machine's power and how to restart the machine. Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [Power] button on the operation panel.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS Bypass tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 5 (BP-LC11) Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 (MX-LC19) THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE To indicate the landscape setting, "R" is added to the end of the name of a paper size enabled for both landscape and portrait settings.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES This section describes paper types that can be used and those that cannot be used. All types of paper other than plain paper are referred to as special media. • Various types of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Specifications of paper that can be used for two-sided printing Paper Type Plain, Recycled, Colour, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Punched, Heavy Paper (106 g/m2 (28 lbs. bond) to 220 g/m2 (140 lbs.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Setting orientation of the print side The setting orientation varies for the print side of paper, depending on the tray used. For "Letter Head" and "Pre-Printed", set the paper in the reverse orientation. Place with the print side facing the direction indicated below.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IN THE TRAY 1/2 A maximum of 1250 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") paper can be loaded into tray 1. A maximum of 850 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") paper can be loaded into tray 2. If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings (administrator)". An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or type or paper misfeeds.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 3 Indicator line Lift the feed roller, and place paper into the tray. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1250 sheets for tray 1, or maximum of 850 sheets for tray 2). Do not load the paper as shown below. Indicator line Lower the feed roller, and gently push the paper tray into the machine. 4 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Before changing the paper size of tray 2, raise the paper guide. 2 (1) Attach the paper size guide and transparent sheet appropriately for the size of paper to be used. (2) (1) Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the appropriate slot on the base of the tray. LT A4 Align the paper size guide with the slot for the paper size to be used (indicated by the paper size mark).
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 4 Set the paper size and paper type. Be sure to set the paper size and paper type by selecting [Tray Settings] in the home screen or in "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings]. If the paper size setting is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER A non-standard size of paper can only be loaded in tray 4. A non-standard size of paper cannot be loaded in tray 3. 3 Fan the paper. 4 Insert the paper into the tray. Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets). Do not load the paper as shown below.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING TAB PAPER INTO TRAY 4 1 Remove the tab paper guide. 2 Pull out the tray and install the guide. 3 Insert the tab paper into the tray. The guide is stored inside the front cover. Adjust the guide plates to the triangle mark position. Install the guide so that it may cover the guide plates. Adjust the guide plates in the tray to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER See the following figure and adjust the tab position of the tab paper. Tab paper Originals Top edge ABC DEF Side 1 1st page GHI JKL Tail edge 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 4th page 3rd page 2nd page Gently push the tray into the machine, and set the paper type to tab paper. 4 Using "Paper Tray Settings" in the system settings, set the paper type to tab paper.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE CAPACITY TRAY Use the large capacity tray for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray. • Large capacity tray (BP-LC11) stores a maximum of 3500 sheets of A4 and 8-1/2" × 11" paper. • Large capacity tray (MX-LC19) stores a maximum of 3000 sheets of paper from A3W (12" × 18") to B5 (8-1/2" × 11"R). When changing the paper size, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Gently push the paper tray into the machine. 4 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly. Forcefully inserting the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds. LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (MX-LC19) Press the operation button. 1 The operation button blinks, and the tray paper table goes down to the paper loading position. Wait until the operation button light goes off. Do not pull out the tray until the light goes off.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 4 Indicator line Place the paper in the center of the paper table. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3000 sheets). When a certain volume of paper is loaded, the paper table automatically goes down slightly and stops. Repeat this operation in the same way to load paper. • Do not insert your hand into the space inside the paper table when you load paper.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Changing the paper size for the large capacity tray (MX-LC19) Loosen the paper guide screw. 1 2 Slide the plate of the paper guide. Plate Slide the plate until the red line appears at the center of the size window of the plate. Adjust the paper guide to the paper size that will be used. 3 Slide the paper guide forward or backward until the size mark of the paper to be used ( or ) appears in the size window of the plate. 4 Secure the paper guide.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Change the right paper guide to the paper size to be used. 6 (1) While holding up the paper guide lock, slide the paper guide to the paper size to be used. (2) Release the paper guide lock. (3) Move the paper guide slightly to the right and left so that it locks into place. You will hear a "click" when the paper guide locks. 7 Set the paper size and paper type.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to 100 sheets of paper can be loaded (Heavy paper weighing between 106 g/m2 and 256 g/m2 (28 lbs. bond and 140 lbs. index): 40 sheets, heavy paper weighing between 257 g/m2 and 300 g/m2 (140 lbs. index and 110 lbs. cover), transparency film, and tab paper: 20 sheets) for continuous printing, just like operation using other trays.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER INSERTING TRANSPARENCY FILM • Use SHARP-recommended transparency film. • When loading multiple sheets of transparency film into the bypass tray, fan the sheets several times before loading. • When printing on transparency film, remove each sheet as it is printed and output from the machine. If multiple sheets of film are allowed to stack on the output tray, the sheets may stick together or become curled.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Important points when using label sheets • Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation. Follow such instructions. If a form is already printed on the labels, and the print images and the preprinted form do not line up, adjust the application or printer driver settings to rotate the print images. • Do not use the following types of label sheets.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Open the bypass tray. 1 When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, pull out the extension guide. Pull the extension guide all the way out. Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray. Load the paper with the print side facing down. 2 Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops slowly. Inserting the paper with excessive force may cause the leading edge to fold back.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below. 1 Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray. 2 Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray. 3 Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray. 4 Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Place the original in the automatic document feeder. Depending the type and status of the original, use the document glass. Follow the instructions to select the method for placing the original.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL Original Feeding Mode The following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, and scan to local drive. When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time you need to use it. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Condition Settings] → [Original Feeding Mode]. • Mixed Size Doc.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder. • Place originals of different sizes together, if needed, in the automatic document feeder. In that case, use the "Others" function in each mode to set [Mixed Size Original]. • See the following pages for the combinations of document sizes that can be loaded.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL Allowed original sizes Minimum original size Maximum original size Standard size (Minimum size that can be automatically detected) A6R: 105 mm (longitudinal) × 148 mm (transversal) 5-1/2" (longitudinal) × 8-1/2" (transversal) Non-standard size (Minimum size that can be specified manually) 51 mm (longitudinal) x 128 mm (transversal) 2-1/64" (longitudinal) x 5-3/64" (transversal) Business card: 51 mm (longitudinal) x 89 mm (transversal) Standard size (Max
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL 1 2 Make sure that there is no original on the document glass. Below the indicator line Place the original. Align the edges evenly and face them up Insert to the end Up to 300 sheets can be inserted. After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder, remove originals from the original exit tray.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL PREVENTIVE LIGHT TO INDICATE ORIGINAL LEFT BEHIND In order to prevent originals being left behind, the automatic document feeder incorporates a lamp on the top of the original exit tray. This lamp detects a document on the automatic document feeder, and starts blinking after the last original is output from the original exit tray. Light turning off The preventive light to indicate original left behind will turn off in the event of the following.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL ORIGINAL SETTING INDICATOR The original setting indicator lights when the document is correctly loaded on the document feeder tray. If the original setting indicator is lit, it is possible for a user who has difficulty in confirming that a document is loaded on the document feeder tray to confirm that the document is loaded. SKEW FEED PREVENTION The automatic document feeder is equipped with a skewed feed prevention function.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT GLASS This section describes the steps for setting the original on the document glass. • Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it. • Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL 3 Close the automatic document feeder. After placing the original, close the automatic document feeder. If the unit is left open, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner. • When closing, open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it. • If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or paste up glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERIPHERAL DEVICES Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality. The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Product name Product number Description Application communication module BP-AM10 Sharp OSA (page 9-42) External account module BP-AM11 Sharp OSA (page 9-42) Wireless connection adaptor BP-EB10 Adds the wireless LAN or Bluetooth function to the machine. Stamp unit AR-SU1 This stamps each original page after it is scanned in image send mode. An automatic document feeder is required.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FINISHER This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES (1) (2) (5) (1) (3) (4) (6) Output tray (upper tray) The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 paper, extend the tray. (2) Top cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. 1 When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts. • To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key. • Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11 FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge 1 Open the front cover. 2 Remove the staple case. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. 4 Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 5 Push the staple case firmly back in. 6 Close the front cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES (1) (4) (2) (3) (1) Staple compiler (3) Output paper that will not be offset in this tray. The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for printing on large-size paper (A3W, A3, B4, 12" × 18", 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14" and 8-1/2" × 13" sizes).
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX2 FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge 1 Open the front cover.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Remove the empty staple cartridge. 3 When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. 4 Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 5 Install a staple case. 6 Close the front cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES DISCARDING STAPLE WASTE When a finisher is used for stapling, staple waste is produced. The staple waste is collected in the staple waste box. Follow the steps below to discard staple waste. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Grasp the tab of the staple waste box, gently pull out the box, and discard the staple waste. • Do not put your fingers into the staple waste box. The staples may prick and injure your fingers. • Do not discard the staple waste in a plastic bag.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Close the front cover.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. 1 When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts. • To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key. • Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge (finisher unit) 1 Open the front upper cover. 2 Remove the staple case. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Close the front upper cover. 6 Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Replacement the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). Do not replace removed output back in the output tray. 1 Open the front upper cover. 2 Slowly pull out the front lower cover until it stops.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Remove the staple case. 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 5 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Replace both staple cartridges. Push the staple case firmly back in. 6 Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 7 Push the front lower cover back in. 8 Close the front upper cover. When the staple cartridge has been replaced, the staple is automatically tested. Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the center of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX2 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 2 Squeeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then out. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. 4 Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Install a staple case. 5 Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Close the front cover. 6 Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Replacement the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). Do not replace removed output back in the output tray 1 Open the front cover. 2 Grasp the handle on the saddle stitch unit and pull it slowly out until it stops.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case. 3 Pull the staple case out to the left. Replace both staple cartridges. 4 Press the lock button to open the release lever. 5 Remove the empty staple cartridge. Press the lock button to open the release lever. Install a new staple cartridge. 6 Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 7 Press the lock button to open the release lever. 8 Push the staple case firmly back in. 9 Push the saddle stitch unit in. Align of the staple case with of the unit. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. 10 Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES DISCARDING STAPLE WASTE When a finisher is used for stapling, staple waste is produced. The staple waste is collected in the staple waste box. Follow the steps below to discard staple waste. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Grasp the tab of the staple waste box, gently pull out the box, and discard the staple waste. • Do not put your fingers into the staple waste box. The staples may prick and injure your fingers. • Do not discard the staple waste in a plastic bag.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Close the front cover. 4 DISCARDING PAPER WASTE When folded paper is trimmed in trimmer settings, paper waste is generated. Paper waste is collected in the paper waste box. Follow the operation procedure to remove paper waste. Using the trimmer function trims a side drop at the time of folding, creating a neat finish. Open the front cover.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Grasp the paper waste box handle, gently pull out the box, and discard the paper waste. 2 Discard the paper waste into a plastic bag or other container, being careful not to let any waste scatter. 3 Gently push the box back in. 4 Close the front cover.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FOLDING UNIT A folding unit can be used for Z-Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold, Double Fold, and Half Fold. A finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to install the folding unit. PART NAMES (1) (2) (3) (1) Top cover (3) Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed. (2) Output tray of folding unit Folded output is delivered to this tray. Bottom cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES INSERTER Covers and insertion sheets to be inserted into printed sheets can be loaded. Using the manual finishing function, you can directly feed paper into the finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) to staple, punch or fold the paper. For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the inserter, see the "SPECIFICATIONS" in the "Start Guide".
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN16B/C/D) The punch module can be installed on a finisher or saddle stitch finisher to punch holes in paper to be output. A finisher or saddle stitch finisher is required to install the punch module. DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Close the front cover.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN13A/B/C/D) The punch module can be installed on a finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) to punch holes in paper to be output. A finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to install the punch module (large stacker). DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Gently push the box back in. 4 Close the front cover.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE REGULAR MAINTENANCE To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine. Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result. • Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolour the housing.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE SCANNING AREA If black lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area(the thin long glass next to the document glass). To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position. 1 Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Replace the glass cleaner. 6 CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE CLEANING THE PAPER FEED ROLLER When using the automatic document feeder, if the placed original is smudged or jammed, wipe the surface of the paper feed roller in the direction of the arrow with a clean, soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent. Be careful not to bend or detach the plastic sheet.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE Always replace the toner cartridge after the "Change the toner cartridge." message appears. You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out. Empty toner cartridge can be replaced without interrupting a copy/print job. REPLACEMENT MESSAGE When this message appears, prepare a toner cartridge for replacement.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Open the front cover. 1 Hold both sides and close. Pull the toner cartridge toward you. 2 Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine. 3 Take out a new toner cartridge from its package and shake it five or six times. 4 Slowly insert the new toner cartridge on the level.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Close the front cover. 6 After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode. Do not open the front cover while this is occurring. Hold both sides and close. • Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns. • Store toner cartridges out of reach of small children. • If a toner cartridge is stored upright, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their side.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER The toner collection container collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the toner collection container becomes full, the message "Replace toner collection container." will appear. Replace the toner collection container as instructed by the message in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for replacing the toner collection container will appear. Follow the instructions.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 3 Place the toner collection container on a flat surface and close the cap. Cap Place a sheet of paper such as newspaper on the surface before placing the toner collection container. • Keep the toner collection container in an upright position without collapsing it. • Do not point the holes down as used toner will spill out.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become light, replace thestamp cartridge (AR-SV1). Supplies Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1 1 Open the automatic document feeder. 2 Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder. Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 6 Push the stamp unit back in. 7 Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet. Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place. When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attachesto the automatic document feeder. Make sure that the document backplate sheet is firmly attached to the automatic document feeder and then close the automatic document feeder.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE TOUCH PANEL JOB STATUS TOUCH TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS . . . . . . . . ACTION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2-2 2-5 2-6 2-6 STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS . . . . . . . .
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►TOUCH PANEL TOUCH PANEL TOUCH TYPES OPERATION TYPES In addition to tapping, equivalent to conventional touching, the touch panel of the machine can be operated by long touching, flicking and sliding. Tapping Touch the panel with your finger and then lift it quickly. Use this method to select a key, tab or check box. Easy Scan Document Filing Sharp OSA No.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►TOUCH PANEL Operation on respective screens Key (tapping) A. Tap to select an item. The selected key turns into a different colour. B. Tap numeric keys to enter numbers. C. Tap to increase or decrease the value. Long touching causes the value to be increased or decreased until you stop touching. D. Tap to enter a checkmark and enable the setting. E. Tap here to close the screen (E) (A) (B) (B) (C) (D) (C) List (tapping, sliding and flicking) A. Tap to select an item.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►TOUCH PANEL Tab (tapping) A. Tap a tab to switch what is displayed. (A) Preview screen (Double tapping/ Pinch/ Spread) A. When a preview screen is "pinched", the screen image is reduced. When "spread", the image is enlarged. When "Double tapping", the image is also enlarged.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►TOUCH PANEL OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS Numeric keys Tap a number to enter it. To clear the entered number, tap the [C] key 1 No. of copies 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 C 0 On the address screen, you can enter characters other than numbers, and a different key layout is provided. You can also move the cursor by using the [←] and [→] keys. Tap the [C] key to delete one character to the left of the cursor. [Start] key Tap to perform a print or send job.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►TOUCH PANEL ACTION PANEL Recommended functions are displayed on the action panel when you configure functions in each mode. From the action panel, you can configure functions or combine the configured function with a function displayed on the action panel. If the action panel does not appear, tap the action panel tab. The functions displayed on the action panel vary depending on the mode or the functions that have been configured.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN HOME SCREEN Tapping the [Home Screen] key displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions. OVERVIEW (1) (6) (7) (2) (3) (8) (4) (9) (5) (1) System Information area Tap this area to display the System Information screen. ► SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN (page 2-6) (2) [Home Screen] Switch to the home screen.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN Recent jobs Tap this key to display the contents of the most recently used jobs in a list. Tap an item in the list to set the contents in the list.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN ICON INDICATING THE STATUS OF THE MACHINE Icon Machine status Icon Machine status Printer data is being processed. A USB device is installed. Printer data is being printed. The field support system is enabled. Send data exists. Single-byte alphanumeric character entry Forward error data exists. A data security kit is installed. Received data exists. Connecting to the access point (Level 4) Received confidential fax data exists.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN CHANGING MODES Changing mode from the Home screen Easy Scan Easy Copy Document Filing Sharp OSA Original System Info. Job Status Easy Scan Easy Copy Detail A4 CA Changing mode from the mode display Document Filing Sharp OSA System Info.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN PREVIEW SCREEN In the preview screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel. [Easy mode] [Normal mode] A4 OK Preview CA Start Scan Again Keys used in the preview screen This changes the mode to edit mode. Pages of the original can be changed, rotated, or deleted. * * * This reduces the image. , * This rotates the preview image of whole page in the arrow's direction.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN Deleting a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to delete, and tap . 2 5 6 Edit End • You can also delete the page by tapping [Delete the Page] on the action panel. • You can also delete the page by dragging a page to . Select the location to move. 6 Edit End • To undo the deletion, tap . To redo the deletion, tap 6 Edit End 3 Tap the [Edit End] key. 2-12 .
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN Moving a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to move, and drag to move the page. 2 6 Edit End You can also move the page by tapping [Move the Page] on the action panel and then tap 3 of the destination. Tap the [Edit End] key. Rotating a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to rotate, and drag or to rotate the page.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN Setting chapter inserts When N-Up or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with 1 In the preview screen, tap to the first page. to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to set chapter inserts. 2 2 Edit End Tap 3 . is displayed on the page. 2 Edit End • You can also set chapter inserts by tapping [Specify Chapter Inserts] on the action panel.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN Inserting a blank page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap , and tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank page. 2 Edit End You can also insert a blank page by tapping [Insert Blank Page] on the action panel. 3 Tap the [Edit End] key. Deleting part of the original image 1 2 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN 3 Erase Specified Range Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range. Exit Start Point X 40 Y 15 Specify the erase range and then tap the [OK] key. Height 30 Width 125 Clear OK Specify Range2 Specify Range3 Specify Range4 To delete the image outside the selected range, tap [Reverse Erase Range] on the action panel. 4 Erase Specified Range Apply This Erase Position to All Pages.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN Changing the settings Tapping the tab on the left of the screen allows you to change the settings. You cannot tap the keys for functions whose settings cannot be changed.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL EDITING THE HOME SCREEN In the home screen, you can change the number of shortcut keys shown and change shortcut keys. This includes changing the background and text colour, and changing the background to a custom image. ADDING SHORTCUT KEYS This section explains how to add a shortcut key to the home screen. You can add a shortcut key using the touch panel, or from the Web page.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Tap an empty shortcut key location. 4 Tap the function you want to add. 5 The shortcut key will be added to the selected location. After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key. From the Web page 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Select the function you want to add. To change the name of a shortcut key, select [Custom] in [Key Name] and enter the desired name in the text box. To change the image of a shortcut key, go to the next step. If you are not changing the image, go to step 5. 4 To change the image of a shortcut key, set the [Use Custom Image] checkbox to , and select a previously added image with [Select File].
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL EDITING SHORTCUT KEYS You can add shortcut keys to the home screen, and delete unneeded shortcut keys. You can also change the display order of the shortcut keys and change names and images to make the machine easier to use. 05:45 05:45 I want to delete the [Address Control ] shortcut key. From the touch panel Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home]. 1 User’s Manual The administrator password screen appears.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL Tap the [Yes] key. 4 5 The selected shortcut key will be deleted. After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key. From the Web page 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address. 2 On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Click [Condition Settings] and click the shortcut key you want to delete. 4 Select [None] and click the [Submit] button. 5 When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button. When you click the [Submit] button, the [Home Screen Registration] screen closes. The settings are saved in the machine and applied. When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING A SHORTCUT KEY This section explains how to change a shortcut key in the home screen. Only the name can be changed from the touch panel. You can change the icon image from the Web page.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL A yellow frame appears around the selected shortcut key. 3 A yellow frame appears around the selected shortcut key. Enter the new name by keyboard. 4 5 Enter the name, and tap the [OK] key. After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key. From the Web page 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Click [Condition Settings], and click the shortcut key you want to change. 4 Select the desired function. To change the name of a shortcut key, select [Custom] in [Key Name] and enter the desired name in the text box. To change the image of a shortcut key, go to the next step. If you are not changing the image, go to step 5.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL ADDING A SHORTCUT KEY IMAGE To change a shortcut key image to a new image, you must first add the new image. This section explains how to add an image. Images are added by using the Web page. I want to add this image 05:45 05:45 I want to change the [Settings] shortcut key. User’s Manual Brightness Adjustment Brightness Adjustment Icon images are automatically enlarged or reduced to match the size of the shortcut keys.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 4 Select any item 5 Select the file to be added in "Select File". If you are adding a new image, click "Not Set". If "Not Set" items are all in use, click an unneeded item in the already added items. Click the [Browse] button, and select the image to be submitted. • File formats that can be used are JPEG, GIF and PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, gif and png). • The maximum file size of an image that can be used for a shortcut key is 50 KB.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL MOVING A SHORTCUT KEY This section explains how to move a shortcut key in the home screen. Shortcut keys are moved by using the touch panel. 05:45 I want to move the [PC Scan] shortcut key. 05:45 User’s Manual Brightness Adjustment Brightness Adjustment Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home]. 1 User’s Manual The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password. 2 Enter the administrator password.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL Tap an empty shortcut key location 4 5 The shortcut key moves to the tapped location. The shortcut key will not move if you tap a location that already has a shortcut key. After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL RETURNING THE SHORTCUT KEYS TO THE FACTORY DEFAULT STATE This section explains how to return the shortcut keys in the home screen to the factory default state. This procedure can be performed from the touch panel or from the Web page. I want to return changed shortcut keys to the factory default state. User’s Manual The positions, names, and images of the shortcut keys are returned to the factory default state.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Tap [Return Layout to Factory Default] on the action panel. 4 Tap the [Reset] key. 5 The shortcut keys are returned to the factory default state. After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key. From the Web page 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Click [Condition Settings], and click the [Return to the Defaults] button. 4 When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button. A confirmation window appears. Click the [OK] button. The settings are saved in the machine and applied. When you have finished settings, click the [Logout] button and close your Web browser.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING THE TRANSPARENCY OF A SHORTCUT KEY You can change the transparency of the shortcut keys. If you want to change the background of your home screen to show what's behind the shortcut keys, increase the transparency to make it easier to see what's behind the shortcut keys. This procedure can be performed from the touch panel or from the Web page.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL Tap the [Finish and Return] key. 4 Manual 5 After completing the settings, tap the [Logout] key. From the Web page 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. 2 On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings]. 3 Click [Condition Settings], and click the [Key Transparency Setting] button. 4 When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING THE LAYOUT PATTERN OF THE HOME SCREEN Multiple home screen layout patterns are preset in the machine. These include a layout pattern that reduces the display size of the shortcut keys to increase the number of keys shown, and a layout pattern that eliminates the fixed key display area to increase the number of shortcut keys shown. The layout pattern can be changed in the Web page.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 2 On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings]. 3 Click [Condition Settings] and select the desired layout pattern from the "Template". 4 When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button. Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings]. If you did not perform user authentication, you must enter the administrator password.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL SELECTING A MFP DISPLAY PATTERN FOR THE HOME SCREEN Multiple colour patterns are preset in the machine. You can change the colour pattern from the touch panel. I want to change the color pattern of the home screen. User's Manual User's Manual Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [MFP Display Pattern Setting]. 1 User's Manual The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password. 2 Enter the administrator password.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL Select the desired pattern. 3 4 After settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING THE COLOUR OF TEXT ON THE HOME SCREEN You can change the colour of the text in shortcut keys, fixed keys, and the clock on the home screen to white or black. The colour is changed using the touch panel. I want to change the text colour to black. User's Manual The colour of text on the home screen varies depending on the layout pattern.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password. 2 Enter the administrator password. Change the text colour. 3 User s User's Manual 4 After settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING THE BACKGROUND IMAGE OF THE HOME SCREEN You can change the background image of the home screen to a custom image. This procedure can be performed from the touch panel or from the Web page. To change the image from the touch panel, first save the desired image in a USB device and connect the device to the machine. I want to change the Enlarge Settings Total Count User's background Display image.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL The administrator password entry screen will appear while you are selecting settings. Enter the administrator password and log in. 4 Set the [Use Custom Image] checkbox to with [Folder Name/File Name]. , and select the desired image • File formats that can be used are JPEG, GIF and PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, gif and png). • The maximum file size of an image that can be used for the background image is 640 KB. 5 Click the [Store] button.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Click the [Change] button in [Background Image]. 4 Set the [Use Custom Image] checkbox to [Select File]. , and select the image with Click [Browse] to select the image. • File formats that can be used are JPEG, GIF and PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, gif and png). • The maximum file size of an image that can be used for the background image is 640 KB. 5 When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING THE FIXED KEYS You can change the fixed keys. The fixed keys are changed using the Web page. 10:15 I want to add "Language Setting" in the fixed key display area. 10:15 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address. 2 On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings].
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Click [Condition Settings], and click the desired item under "Fix Key". 4 Select the function you want to add, and click the [Submit] button. 5 When you have finished configuring the settings, click the [Submit] button. You can click [Not Set] to add a new fixed key. When you click the [Submit] button, the [Home Screen Registration] screen closes. The settings are saved in the machine and applied.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL INCREASING THE TEXT SIZE In a Normal mode screen such as copy or image send, you can enlarge the character size and interval. This function is selected on the touch panel. Address Address • The setting keys and the action panel will increase the text size. Setting items that no longer appear on the action panel can be displayed by tapping the scroll keys.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING THE LANGUAGE USED ON THE MACHINE You can change the language used in the home screen. I want to change the language to Japanese. User's Manual Open the action panel on the home screen, and tap [Edit Home]. 1 User's Manual The administrator password screen appears. Enter your password. 2 Enter the administrator password.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL 3 Tap an empty shortcut key location. 4 Tap the [Language Setting] key. 5 The shortcut key will be added to the selected location. After settings are completed, tap the [Logout] key. Tap the [Language Setting] key on the home screen. 6 User's Manual Select the desired language and tap . 7 The display changes to the selected language.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL From the Web page 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address. 2 On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Common Settings]→ [Operation Settings]→ [Condition Settings]→ [Language Setting]. This settings may require that you enter your user password.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL CHANGING THE POSITION OF THE [Home Screen] KEY You can change the position of the [Home Screen] key. From the touch panel Tap the [Settings] key on the Home screen. 1 The screen changes to the settings screen. 2 Tap [System Settings] → [Home Screen Settings] and then tap [Home Button Position] key. The administrator password entry screen will appear while you are selecting settings. Enter the administrator password and log in.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF THE TOUCH PANEL From the Web page 1 Enter the IP address set in the machine in the address bar of your web browser. In the factory default state, you must enter your user password after entering the IP address. 2 On the Web page, click the [System Settings] tab → [Home Screen Settings] → [Home Button Position]. Some settings may require that you enter your user password after clicking [Home Screen Settings].
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS JOB STATUS STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS TYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENS When you tap the job status display, the job status screen appears. Tap it again to return to the previous mode. The job status screen is divided into the following four tabs, enabling you to select a job list by tapping a desired tab.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS Jobs move among the lists according to the processing status, from [Spool], [Job Queue] and [Complete], in that order. To switch the job list display to the display by processing status, tap the [Spool], [Job Queue] or [Complete] key as desired. • Spool list Lists print jobs up to the transfer to the machine. The jobs move to the Job Queue list after the transfer is completed.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED 1 Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job that you wish to stop or delete. Tap the [Job Queue] key. 2 When you wish to stop a print job being sent from the computer, tap the [Spool] key. 3 Tap the job that you wish to stop or delete, and then tap [Stop/Delete] on the action panel. When a screen appears that allows you to confirm that you do want to stop the job, tap the [Cancel] key.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB This function gives priority to processing of copied, faxed or image send jobs arising later to jobs already in a queue for printing or sending. Priority processing operation varies, as follows, depending on the job type. • Job on the print tab The job currently in progress is suspended to let the priority job make interruption.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS Changing the job order If there is a job in progress, an interrupt job can be performed, or a job can be moved down in the queue to change the job order. Tap the key of the job you want to move, and tap the "Priority Change" key. • key Moves the selected job to the top of the queue. The current job will be interrupted and the selected job starts. • key Moves the selected job up one position.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS 1 Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. Tap the [Job Queue] key. 2 3 Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel. • Different job contents appear in different modes. • For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in "Status", see "READING THE JOB LIST (page 2-60)".
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS 1 Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. Tap the [Complete] key. 2 3 Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel. Jobs you can check are displayed as keys so that you can tap them. • Different job contents appear in different modes.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS READING THE JOB LIST The meaning of each job icon and message displayed in "Status" is as follows: Icons indicating the job type Print job (RGB/CMYK) Copy job Scan to E-mail job Scan to FTP job Scan to Network Folder job Scan to Desktop job Fax transmission job Fax reception job PC-Fax transmission job Internet fax transmission job (Including Direct SMTP) PC-I-Fax transmission job Scan to Local Drive file print job Internet fax reception job (Including Direct
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS Messages displayed in "Status" Job in progress Display Status "Printing" Print job in progress "Copying" Copy job in progress "Connecting" Connecting "Sending" Sending "Receiving" Receiving "Processing" Processing "Tel" Speaking with the other party using an external telephone "Stopped" The job has been stopped "Toner Empty" Toner Empty "Paper Empty" Paper Empty "Paper Jam" Paper jam "Waiting" Waiting "Warming up" Warming up "Limit" Having re
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►JOB STATUS Completed job Display Status "OK" Normal termination "Send OK" Transmission was completed. "NG Ck Line" Fax line cable is not connected "In Memory" Reception completed but the fax has not been printed. The received data (each page) has not been printed or forwarded. (The received data has not been deleted.) "Received" Printed received fax data. The fax has been received. The received data (each file) was stored.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHARACTER ENTRY CHARACTER ENTRY CHARACTER ENTRY NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS Display the soft keyboard to register the name of a file, program, folder or user. (8) (9) (1) (2) (10) (11) (3) (4) (5) (6) (12) (7) (14) (13) (1) (9) Text input area (3) Registered word key Retrieves the stored words. Use "Settings" to store words. (10) [Symbols] key Keyboard (11) Backspace key Switch to other input modes. Deletes one character to the left.
OPERATION OF THE MACHINE►CHARACTER ENTRY SET THE KEYBOARD SETTING In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Keyboard Settings]. Keyboard Settings Default Keyboard Setting Configure settings for the keyboard used for entry on the text. Keyboard Select Change the key layout and display according to the set language.
COPIER INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 BATCH COPY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPIER SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103 SCANNING HEAVY ORIGINALS (HEAVY PAPER SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104 ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING (RESOLUTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105 TEXT AND IMAGE ADDITION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 3-106 PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPY MODE There are two modes for copying: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most copy jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for copying.
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER The following features can be set in easy mode.
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for copying. (11) (10) (1) (9) (2) (8) (7) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) Setting keys used for copying. (7) Starts copying. (2) Your favorite setting items will be displayed. Register frequently used [Other] and programs. Favorites can be registered when you register a program. (8) Reset all settings. (9) Scans the original and shows a preview image.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy operation takes place smoothly. For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter. 1 Switch to copy mode. CHANGING MODES (page 2-10) Place the original.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 Select functions. Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc. Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Scan the original. Tap the [Preview] key to scan the original. In Easy mode 5 In Normal mode • To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original. AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 3-14) • When not checking the preview image, tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 Check the preview image. Display the preview image of the scanned original. In the preview screen, check the settings. PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11) In Easy mode 6 In Normal mode 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. • To cancel all settings, tap the [CA] key. When the [CA] key is tapped, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base screen.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES • To make two or more sets of copies: Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. In Easy mode In Normal mode • In normal mode, you can tap [File] or [Quick File] on the action panel before starting the copy job to save the scanned original as a file. QUICK FILE (page 7-9) FILE (page 7-10) DEFAULT SETTINGS FOR COPYING Set in “Initial Status Settings” of “Copy Settings” in the System Settings.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE EASY MODE The size of the placed original is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. When you place the original in the automatic document feeder, the original icon appears next to the original size. Original Detail A4 Paper Select 2-Sided Copy Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off A4 Tray 1 1→1 NORMAL MODE Check the size of the placed original on the display of the [Original] key.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ORIENTATION OF PLACED ORIGINAL Place the original as shown below. If you place the original in an incorrect orientation, it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling. On "Preview Screen", view the image orientation or preview image. PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11) cba Document glass cba abc Document feeder tray abc Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original (Auto Paper Select). If the original size cannot be detected correctly because it is a non-standard size or when you want to change the paper size for copying, you can select the paper tray manually.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Originals Copies Originals Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-side originals Copies Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-side originals Originals Copies 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals • To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original. • Dual-side copy helps to save paper.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Originals Copy Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Dual-side copy helps to save paper. 1 2 3 Place the original on the document glass. DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Tap the [2-Sided Copy] key. BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES (page 3-6) (1) 2-Sided Copy 1→1 1→2 2→2 OK 2→1 (3) Tablet (1) Tap the [1 → 2] key.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 6 7 Tap the [Start] key. Set the next original, and tap the [Start] key to scan the original. Tap the same key you tapped in step 5. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned. Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying. Place next original. Press [Start]. When finished, press [Read-End].
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original being copied. ([Auto] is displayed.) MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE This section explains how to select the original type depending on the original to be copied or manually adjust the exposure.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 Tap the required original image type key to specify the original type. OK Exposure/Original Type Auto Tap the key matching the original. Manual Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photo Printed Photo Photo Map Light Original Copy of Copy Copy Original with Highlighted Lines Original image type select keys • Text: Use this mode for regular text documents.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ENLARGE/REDUCE AUTO RATIO SELECT This section explains how to automatically select the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray to make a copy on paper that has a size different from the original.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES MANUAL RATIO SELECTION This section explains how to specify any ratio when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the image size for copying. The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio. Specifying the desired zoom ratio You can adjust the zoom ratio in 1% increments using or the 10 key to specify the desired zoom ratio.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the desired zoom ratio 1 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. COPY MODE (page 3-3) OK Copy Ratio Auto Image 100 - % Slightly Reduce (3% Reduction) + Tap to set the ratio. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the image dimensions 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. 3 EASY MODE (page 3-3) Zoom B4->B5 A3->A4 70% B5->A5 B4->A4 81% A4->B5 A3->B4 86% Other Ratio 4 Tap the [by Size] key of the [Zoom] tab.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY This section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios. When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio. Using the preset ratio key Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key, which is pre-registered.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Using the preset ratio key 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] tab. 3 EASY MODE (page 3-3) Zoom XY Zoom Y X Tap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratio. OK Copy Ratio 100 100 ( 25~200 ) % ( 25~200 ) % Auto Image 50% 141% 64% 200% 70% 400% 100% by Size • To quickly set the ratio, first specify a value close to the desired one, then adjust it with .
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the image dimensions 1 2 Tap the [by Size] key. Specifying the desired zoom ratio (page 3-21) Copy Ratio OK by Size OK Specify the X and Y dimensions of the image size and those of the output size. The copy ratio is calculated from specified sizes. Enter the image size and the finished size.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized. Set the orientation and size of the original before scanning the original.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Tap the appropriate original size key. 3 After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF A NON-STANDARD SIZE ORIGINALS 1 Tap the [Original] key to set the orientation of the original. 2 Tap the [Auto] key. 3 Tap the [Direct Entry] key. 4 COPY MODE (page 3-3) Specify the original size. Direct Entry OK 297 420 After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. OK Original Store/Delete Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size. To amend or delete a previously stored key: Tap the key that you want to amend or delete. The following screen will appear. • To amend the key, tap the [Amend] key and go to the next step. • To delete the key, tap the [Delete] key.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Retrieving a stored original size 1 Perform steps 1 to 2 in SPECIFY THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26). 2 Tap the [Custom Size] key. Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve. 3 After selecting the key of the original size, tap the [OK] key. To cancel the operation Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [OK] key. Make sure that the original size you have set is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and other special media. For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-12)". For precautions on loading paper into the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-27)".
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY 1 Tap the [Paper Select] key. 2 Tap the [Type and Size] key, and tap the key that meets the type of the loaded paper. 3 Tap the [Size] tab, and tap the key that meets the size of the loaded paper. SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13) • [Auto-AB]: Automatically detects the appropriate AB paper size when loading paper such as A4 or B5.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES OUTPUT Configure the output settings for copies using Sort, Group, Offset, Separator Page, Staple, Punch, or Fold. Also specify the output destination of copies. You can tap the [Output] key in normal mode to configure settings for all output functions. Settings for the staple and punch functions can also be configured from simple mode. Output screen of normal mode Output Tray Specify the destination to output copies.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Separator Page This function inserts separator pages for every specified number of copies or for every job before they are output. This function copies multiple same original images on one sheet. (page 3-59) Sort/Group Select the sorting method when copying the scanned original. "Sort" sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them. "Group" sorts the scanned original on a page basis, and outputs them.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES CHANGING OUTPUT DESTINATION Specify the destination to output copies. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. EASY MODE (page 3-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) 2 Tap the [Output] key. Select the output tray from "Output Tray". 3 After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES SORT/GROUP SETTING This section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original. Auto Enables the sort mode when the original is placed in the automatic document feeder, and enables the group mode when the original is placed on the document glass. Sort Sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES STAPLE SETTINGS Specify whether or not the set of output will be stapled. Portrait orientation Original Orientation Portrait orientation Staple Staple Position Left Top Right 1 Staples 2 Staples Stapleless Staple Landscape orientation 1 Staples 2 Staples Stapleless Staple • You can view staple positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)". Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Staple ON (excluding saddle stitch) 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. COPY MODE (page 3-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) 2 OK Staple / Punch Staple Position Select the number of staples and staple position. • After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. • A binding position cannot be selected for stapleless stapling.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Saddle Stitch 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. COPY MODE (page 3-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) 2 Select . 3 Select binding edge and original settings. MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET) (page 3-67) After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Staple settings in normal mode The setting procedure in normal mode is explained. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. EASY MODE (page 3-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) 2 Tap the [Output] key. Tap the [Staple] tab, and tap the staple position key. 3 Tap the [Original] key to change the original settings.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Saddle stitching for sorted copies This function staples each set of copies at two positions in the center of paper, folds them in half, and outputs them. For saddle folding, it trims a side drop, offering a good-looking output image. The setting procedure in normal mode is explained. 5 6 • You can view staple positions in "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 2-11)". • A saddle stitch finisher is required to use the saddle stitch function.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Tap the [Left Binding/Tablet] or [Right Binding] key to select an original and configure the cover sheet setting. 4 After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. • The original will be scanned from the innermost side when folded. Divide], • If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap [ [ ] or [ ]. [Cancel].: Cancels printing.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES PUNCH SETTINGS This function punches copies and outputs them to the tray. Example: When the original is in either portrait or landscape orientation, and the punch position is set to the left Original 1 Punch Positions Original 2 Punch Positions Original Orientation Punch Position Left OFF Top Right Does not punch. Portrait orientation Landscape orientation • When staple and punch are set at the same time, punch positions are linked to staple positions.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Normal mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. EASY MODE (page 3-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) 2 Tap the [Output] key. Tap the [Punch] tab, select punching and set the position. 3 To change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key, and select the output destination.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES FOLD SETTING This function is used to fold copies before delivery to the output tray. When a paper folding unit is installed, you can fold papers in Z-fold and C-fold. When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, you can use saddle folds. The paper sizes that can be selected vary depending on the type of paper fold.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Folding types Half Fold Usable paper 8-1/2" × 11"R, A4R Print Side Inside Outside C-Fold 8-1/2" × 11"R, A4R Inside Fold Orientation Folding image - A B AB A B BA ABC AC ABC AC - Open Right Open Left Outside Open Right ABC C A Open Left ABC 3-46 CA
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Folding types Accordion Fold Usable paper 8-1/2" × 11"R, A4R Print Side - - Double Fold 8-1/2" × 11"R, A4R Inside Fold Orientation Folding image Open Right ABC AC ABC AC ABCD AD ABCD AD ABCD DA ABCD DA Open Left Open Right Open Left Outside Open Right Open Left 3-47
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Folding types Z-Fold Usable paper 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11"R, A3, B4, A4R Print Side - - Fold Orientation Folding image Open Right ABCD AB D ABCD CD A Open Left *1 Cannot be used when a finisher (large capacity) or saddle stitch finisher (large capacity) is installed. *2 Cannot be used when a finisher or saddle finisher is installed. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Tap the [Detail] key. 4 For the setting method, see "Detail Type for each Folding Type (page 3-49)". After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key. Detail Type for each Folding Type Saddle Fold Specify "Print Side" and "Multiple Fold". The Multiple Fold function folds five sheets at a time. For example, if an original has 12 A4 size plain sheets, they are folded three times in total: 5 sheets + 5 sheets + 2 sheets.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Accordion Fold Specify "Fold Orientation". Double Fold Specify "Print Side" and "Fold Orientation". Z-Fold Specify the paper size and "Fold Orientation" for Z-folding.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBS This function inserts separator pages between each set of copies or between each job. When you insert separator pages between sets of copies, you can specify whether to insert the separator page before or after each set. You can also specify the number of copies that makes one set. When you insert separator pages between jobs, you can specify whether to insert a separator page before or after each job.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Tap the [Separator Page] key. 3 4 Separator Page Specify the separator page insertion mode. OK Insert Top of Sets Bypass Paper Tray Insert End of Sets Bypass Paper Tray 1 • To insert separator pages between sets of copies, set the [Insert Top of Sets] or [Insert End of Sets] checkbox to . Next, tap to specify the number of copies in each set. • To insert separator pages between jobs, set the [Insert Before Job] or [Insert After Job] checkbox to .
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES BATCH COPY FUNCTIONS COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) This function copies multiple original pages onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2-Up to copy two original pages onto one sheet, 4-Up to copy four original pages onto one sheet, or 8-Up to copy eight original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 2 Tap the [N-Up] key. COPY MODE (page 3-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. SPECIFYING THE ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL (page 3-26) 3 OK N-Up 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up Off 4 Tap the number of originals you want to copy collectively, and select the layout key. If needed, the images will be rotated. If you have finished selecting settings, go to step 7.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) This function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document. Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document Books and bound documents are copied into 2 separate pages. 5 6 5 6 • Specify dual page copy before scanning the original.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Place the original on the document glass. 3 DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) The page on this side is copied first. Centreline of original To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) This function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet, not on separate sheets. This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper. For example, both sides of a card can be copied to a single sheet in A4 portrait or landscape.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES • Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. • If the image is missing, enter a slightly larger size. • To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then adjust it by tapping . • When you set the [Adjust to Paper Size] checkbox to to the original size.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT) This function copies multiple same original images on one sheet. You can set any of the following three types of repeat copy. Repeat method Description Auto Repeat The maximum repeat count to copy images on a sheet is calculated automatically according to the original size, paper size, and copy ratio being selected from the base screen.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 3 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Repeat Layout] key. 4 Tap the [Auto Repeat] key. 5 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 7 Specify the repeat partition line. OK Repeat Layout Auto Layout of Repeat Face Based on Original, Paper Size and Ratio. Off After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. Current Setting Auto A4 Original Auto Repeat Paper Select A3 Copy Ratio 100% Layout Layout w/o spacing Fixed Repeat Repeat Number 1 Photo Repeat Parting Line Off • To cancel the Auto Repeat setting: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 Repeat Layout OK Layout OK Tap the [Layout] key. Tap the [Layout w/o spacing] key or the [Layout evenly spaced] key, and then tap the [OK] key. Select Image Layout. Layout w/o spacing Layout evenly spaced 6 Specify the repeat partition line. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. • To cancel the fixed repeat setting: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 7 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Repeat a photo size original in actual size (Photo Repeat) 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 in Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) (page 3-60). 2 Tap the [Photo Repeat] key. 3 Place the original on the document glass. 4 Tap the [Original] key and select an original size. 5 When you tap the original size key, the original direction is indicated in the "How To Set". Place the original to meet the displayed orientation.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING MULTIPLE BUSINESS CARDS (BUSINESS CARD COPY) Business Card Copy can be used to copy up to 8 business cards on one sheet of paper. This function can be used when you want to create the list of business cards, and when you want to file business cards. 1-Sheet Layout, 2-Sheet Layout, 8-Sheet Layout Business Card Copy cannot be selected in easy mode. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 4 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Business Card Copy] key. (1) Specify settings for Business Card Copy. (2) (1) Specify the number of business cards to be copied and touch the [1-Sheet Layout] key or the [2-Sheet Layout] or the [8-Sheet Layout] key. (2) When [8-Sheet Layout] is selected, select the desired layout from "Layout". A4 After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copy results of 8-Sheet Layouts Originals (Original orientation) 1st A 5th E 2nd B 6th F Settings Results A E B F C G D H A B C D E F G H A 3rd C 7th G 4th D 8th H 1st 2nd 3rd D C B A H G F E G E C A H F D B 4th B C D 5th 6th 7th 8th E F G H A A 3-66
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS OUTPUT AND LAYOUT EDITING FUNCTIONS MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET) Copies made by "Booklet" can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS To staple copies automatically when Booklet is enabled: From the "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Condition Settings] → [Automatic Saddle Stitch]. This is used to activate Saddle Stitch automatically when Booklet is enabled when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.To make pamphlet copies without stapling when the [Automatic Saddle Stitch] option is ON, tap the [Output] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence. To change the cover input tray: Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen. For more information, see “SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 3-13)”. • If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH BOOKLET PAGE (BOOKLET 2-Up/4-Up) This function copies two or four original pages equally on one page of pamphlet copy paper. This function is convenient for arranging minimum number of copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet format. Originals Booklet 2-Up 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 3 10 8 14 4 • Booklet 2-Up/4-Up cannot be selected in easy mode.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [1-Sided], [2-Sided Booklet] or [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original. OK Booklet Select Output Binding Edge. Off Select Original Type. Left Binding/ Tablet 1-Sided Right Binding 2-Sided Booklet When not inserting a cover, go to step 6. 2-Sided Tablet Cover Setting 5 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. • To change the cover input tray: Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 9 Tap [Border], and select the border. OK N-Up Select Original Type to Arrange in 1 Page. A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key twice, and [Back] keys in sequence. Layout Off 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up Border Off Original To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 10 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY) This function makes a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document. Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Copy] key. Select a binding position. OK Book Copy Select Original Binding Edge. When not inserting a cover, tap the [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence. Then, go to step 5. Off Left Binding Right Binding Cover Setting To cancel the book copy setting: Tap the [Off] key. 4 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE (BOOK DIVIDE) This function splits a saddle-stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence. • Book Divide cannot be selected in easy mode. • Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original. • This function supports three original binding edges: left binding, right binding, and top open. • The scanned original is split in the centre. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS PAPER, AND TIME SAVING FUNCTIONS SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP) If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an original. Blank page The blank pages are not copied. Copy • If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided copying.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. OK Blank Page Skip After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence. Off Skip Blank Page Skip Blank and Back Shadow To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 5 Tap the [Start] key. (A) Check the confirmation message, and tap the [OK] key to start copying. (B)(C) 5 sheets of original (P.10) have been scanned. Copy 3 pages of the original.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT) You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter. Changing the level of [Background Adjustment] to the [+] side makes the background darker, while changing to the [-] side makes it lighter. Darkness of the light area can be adjusted by this function. Level [+] [+] makes the background darker. [-] makes the background lighter.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS MAKING A PROOF COPY (PROOF COPY) This function makes a proof copy before printing the specified number of copies. Check the preview image with a proof copy. If necessary, change the settings.Using this function stores the scanned original in the machine, saving you the trouble of re-scanning the original in the changed setting.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 Set the number of copies (number of sets) using the numeric keys. 1 No. of copies C Up to 9999 copies (sets) can be set. If an incorrect number of copies is set Tap the [C] key, and enter the correct number. Tap the [Proof Copy] key. 4 Make only one set of copies. Check the copy result. If no problem is found, tap the [Start Print] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS (ORIGINAL COUNT) This function counts the number of scanned original sheets, and displays the result before making a copy. By allowing you to check the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes. • Original count cannot be selected in easy mode. • The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 4 Tap the [Start] key. Check the number of original sheets. 1 pages of original have been scanned. The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME (TANDEM COPY) This function shares a copy job half-and-half between two machines connected to the network, enabling the reduction of the copy time. Primary unit and secondary unit The primary unit performs only scanning, and a secondary unit registered in the primary unit performs only printing without scanning the original.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tandem Copy] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the Tandem Copy setting: Tap the [Tandem Copy] key to uncheck it. 2 3 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [Start] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SECURITY REINFORCEMENT FUNCTIONS PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY PREVENTION DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) Characters to prevent unauthorised copying such as pre-set or customized text are placed as invisible characters in a background pattern. When an output sheet with a pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear. PY AB CD AB CD O TC NO ’ DO T Y P CO NO ’ DO • Hidden Pattern Print cannot be selected in easy mode.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Tap the [On] key, and specify each item in the [Default Settings] tab as required. 3 We recommend you to select the [Positive] option for the "Method". 4 Default Settings Off On Specify each item in the [Print Contents Setting] tab as required. OK Hidden Pattern Print Pre-Set Word Print Contents Setting Disable Copy Pre-Set Text Not Direct Entry Not Input To specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the soft keyboard.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OUTPUT POSITION AND MARGIN ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS ADDING MARGINS (MARGIN SHIFT) This function shifts the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin. This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder. Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge 1 1 Not using the Margin Shift Using the Margin Shift 1 1 The punch holes cut off part of the image.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Margin Shift] key. 3 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Tap the image shift direction. OK Margin Shift Side 1 Side 2 Off Right Left 10 Down ( 0~50 ) mm 10 ( 0~50 ) mm Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st. 4 Sets a margin shift width.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING (ERASE) The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or books.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key. 3 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Erase Clear Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. OK Up Outer Frame Specify Frame+Centre Left Right Down Check that the tapped checkbox is set to .
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (FULL BLEED COPY) This feature lets you copy an entire original to paper larger than the original size with no image cut-off at the edges. • Full Bleed Copy cannot be selected in easy mode. • The punch function cannot be used. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Full Bleed Copy] key. "Select larger paper size than output image size of original." is displayed on the page. Tap [OK] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (CENTRING) This function centres the copied image on the paper. This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced. Not using the centring function Using the centring function • Centring cannot be selected in easy mode. • Centring must be specified before scanning the original.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION (POSITION IMAGE) This function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy. You can make a copy in any desired position as you can fine adjust the position. We recommend that you specify the top as the starting side of the original. Position Image is used Originals Printing paper Position Image is not used Top edge of paper Position Image cannot be selected in easy mode. 1 Copy the original that you want to use for Move Copy.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Position Image Clear Please designate print start position. Side 1 Sets a movement distance. OK Tap the area indicating the movement distance on the front or reverse side, and enter the distance using numeric keys. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence. Side 2 X 0 ( -432~432 ) mm X 0 ( -432~432 ) mm Y 0 ( -297~297 ) mm Y 0 ( -297~297 ) mm Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING FUNCTIONS COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD) This function divides the originals into sets and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals. This saves you the trouble of sorting the copies. When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 Change settings as needed. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Start] key to scan the first original. 3 Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) 4 Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Changing the copy settings for each set of originals As necessary, change copy settings for each set of originals. Perform the steps below before scanning the next set of originals in step 4 of “Copying in job build mode (page 3-97)". A [Separator Page] setting cannot be changed for the second and later sets. 1 Tap the [Change Setting] key. 2 Change copy settings. 3 Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) This feature copies originals in different sizes at the same time even when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS There are two settings for mixed size originals. Same Width Use this setting for originals that are in 2 types of different sizes but have sides that are the same length. The originals are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Place the originals with the corners aligned together in far left corner. Place the original as shown on the Mixed Size Original screen. B4(8-1/2" x 14" B4 Place the original face up on the document feeder tray with the corners aligned together in far left corner. A3(11" x 17") A3 For mixed size originals, set "Original" to "Auto". 4 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE) When you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D • Slow Scan Mode cannot be selected in easy mode. • Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original. The "2-Sided→2-Sided" and "2-Sided→1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING HEAVY ORIGINALS (HEAVY PAPER SCAN) When you wish to scan heavy originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent heavy originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D • Heavy Paper Scan cannot be selected in easy mode. • Heavy Paper Scan must be specified before scanning the original. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Heavy Paper Scan] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING (RESOLUTION) This function adjusts the resolution when scanning the original, enabling the high-quality output or speed-priority output according to the application. • Resolution cannot be selected in easy mode. • Resolution must be specified before scanning the original. • The resolution setting is applied when making a full-size copy. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Scan Resolution] key. Select the resolution.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS TEXT AND IMAGE ADDITION FUNCTIONS PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP) This function prints information such as the "Date" or "Stamp", which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following six types of information. • Date • Page No. • Stamp • Copies • Text • Watermark For the stamp or watermark, you can print text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "PRIORITY". You can print pre-set text or any characters as the text.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS When [Stamp] is combined with other functions: Combined function name Print operation Margin Shift Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width. Tab Copy Centring Unlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp. Dual Page Copy Book Divide Card Shot Stamp items are printed for each copy sheet. N-Up Stamp items are printed for each original page.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. Setting using the [Text] tab Tap the [Direct Entry] key in the [Text] tab to display the soft keyboard. Use the soft keyboard to enter any characters. Stamp OK Cancel All Copies Off Text Watermark 1 2 4 5 3 Pre-Set Text Direct Entry Detail 6 Layout Selecting the format from pre-set text Tapping the [Pre-Set Text] key allows you to select the required one of the registered formats for printing.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL (CUSTOM IMAGE) This function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy. Following are two types of custom images. • Custom stamp (Stamp image) MEMO MEMO C on fid en tia l • Custom watermark (Stamp image with grey-scale watermark) • The combination with other functions is described in the table below. Combined function Custom image operations Margin Shift Shifts in the same way as for an original image.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Combined function Custom image operations B/W Reverse Prints an image as normal without B/W reverse. However, the following condition is set when printed on a dark background. Custom stamp: Printed in white Custom watermark: Printed without being whitened Full Bleed Copy Makes a stamp copy as normal. Centring Makes a stamp copy as normal without centring. Stamp Makes a stamp copy on the Stamp menu. Photo Repeat Cannot be combined.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Set [Print Page] or [Print Position]. 5 (4) After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence. (5) (3) • To cancel the custom image setting: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. For settings related to custom stamp and custom water mark, see the following table. For custom stamp Print Page Specify a page(s) for stamp copy.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) This function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job. It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better. Configure insertion sheet settings if needed. • To insert insertion sheets, see “INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 3-120)". • For N-Up, the layout is based on the first page and excludes covers.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Back Cover 1 Not copied 2 3 4 5 6 Front Cover 1-sided copy 1 Not copied 2 3 4 5 6 Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 2-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2 1 1-sided copy 4 5 Resulting copies Back Cover 3 Front Cover 6 Not copied 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page. Inserts cover sheets at the end of copies. Not copied Not copied 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2-sided copy 3 5 6 1 4 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover 2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Back Cover 2 1 1-sided copy 3 4 5 6 Front Cover 1-sided copy 2 1 1-sided copy 3 4 5 6 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 2-sided copy 2-sided copy 3 4 5 6 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Not copied 3 5 6 1 4 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover Not copied 1-sided copy 3 5 6 1 4 Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies. Not copied 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. *The second original page is not copied.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2-sided copy 3 4 1 6 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover 1-sided copy 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. * The fifth original page is not copied.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Covers/Inserts Front Cover Cancel All Back Cover Tap the [Change] key. OK Insertion Sheet Off Bypass On Plain 1 Change Make No Copy Paper Tray Settings 5 Covers/Inserts Page Layout Cancel All Configure copy setting of a front cover sheet. OK OK Front Cover Setting Print on Front Cover Paper Tray Bypass Plain 1 When only inserting a cover, tap the [Make No Copy] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) This function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet. There are 8 types of insertion sheets. Insertion positions can be specified. Insert covers if needed. When inserting covers, see “INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 3-112)".
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Insertion sheet setting conditions Resulting copies Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode. Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode. 6 5 1 3 5 6 3 4 2 2 1 4 2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet. 2-sided original copying Insertion sheet setting conditions Resulting copies Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode. Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) 2 3 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key. Tap the [Insertion Sheet] tab. Tap the [Insertion Type A] key, and tap the insert page display key. The Insertion Type B to Type H settings are the same as the Insertion Type A settings.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 Covers/Inserts Cancel All When only inserting insertion sheet A, tap the [Make No Copy] key. OK OK Insertion Type A Copy on Insert A Paper Tray Bypass Plain 1 When making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] key. If you selected [2-Sided Copy], tap the [Book] key or [Tablet] key for the insert sheet binding. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT) The editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below. • For the "Cover Sheet", you can change settings such as the paper type, copy/do not copy, 1-Sided, and 2-Sided. • For "Insert Sheet", you can change only the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle. It is also possible to copy on insertion sheets. B C A • Transparency Inserts cannot be selected in easy mode.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Off Tap the [On] key. OK Transparency Inserts When making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to . After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. Also Make Copy on Inserts On Inserts Paper Tray Tray 1 A4 Plain 1 • To cancel the transparency inserts setting: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 5 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIFIC USES COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray, and make a copy on a tab. Prepare originals for captions that match the tab positions. The image is shifted by the width of the tab. ABC ABC ABC DEF DEF GHI GHI Prepare originals that match the tab positions. Prepare originals that match the tab positions.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Tab copying with a right binding Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper Document feeder tray Bypass tray Originals Final image 1 1 Insert the originals so that the side with no tab text enters first. Side 2 Document glass 1 Load the tab paper so that the tab on the first sheet is away from you. Tray 4 Place so that the side with the tab text is on the left. Side 1 Place the first sheet of tab paper so that the tab faces toward you.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS To cancel the tab copy setting: Tap the [Off] key. Load the tab paper. 4 Side 2 When using the bypass tray When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print side down. Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the machine last. After loading tab paper into the bypass tray, configure the bypass tray settings as explained in “MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY (page 3-31)".
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY (MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT) This function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets. For example, an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size original can be enlarged on 8 sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper. • Multi-Page Enlargement cannot be selected in easy mode. • You must select Multi-Page Enlargement before scanning the original. • Place an original on the document glass.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Multi-Page Enlargement Clear Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original to. OK Inch AB Original Size The image orientation appears. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. Enlargement Size A5 A4 A2 (A3x2) A3 B5 A1 (A3x4) B4 A0 (A3x8) A0x2 Print Paste Position Mark When printing the copy image and margin border, set the [Print Paste Position Mark] checkbox to . • To cancel Multi-Page Enlargement setting: Tap the [Clear] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE) This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image. • Mirror Image cannot be selected in easy mode. • Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key. To cancel the mirror image setting: Tap the [Mirror Image] key to uncheck it. 2 Place the original.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OUTPUT AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W REVERSE) This function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image. Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce toner consumption. • B/W Reverse cannot be selected in easy mode. • B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS EASY ADJUSTMENT OF THE IMAGE QUALITY (QUICK IMAGE QUALITY ADJUSTMENT) You can easily adjust the outlines of images and text. • Quick Image Quality Adjustment cannot be selected in easy mode. • You must select Quick Image Quality Adjustment before scanning the original. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Quick Image Quality Adjustment] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the image quality. 2 After the settings are completed, tap [OK] key.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS) This function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image. Softer Sharper • Sharpness cannot be selected in easy mode. • Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness. OK Sharpness Off 1 2 Select [More Sharp] for sharper outlines, or [Less Sharp] for softer outlines.
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS THE ADJUST DENSITY AREA FOR COPY (GREY BALANCE) You can adjust the tone, and density of copies. The density is divided into three ranges, and you can adjust the density of each range. If needed, you can also adjust all three density ranges at once. Black+ • Grey Balance cannot be selected in easy mode. • Grey balance must be specified before scanning the original. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Grey Balance] key. Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the grey balance.
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS INTERRUPT COPY This function suspends a job in progress, and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy. When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy. • The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being scanned. • Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS SEND DATA WHILE COPYING This function allows you to send a fax while making a copy, send an e-mail with an image attached, or save data in the network folder. You need to store the destination in the address book in advance. STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 6-19) The fax and image send transmission starts after the copy, and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission. However, the same results as the copy may not be provided by some functions.
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 5 Set each copy item as required. These copy settings are used for fax transmission. However, some settings may be unavailable depending on the function. You can preview the scanned original by tapping the [Preview] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. After the copy, the transmission starts. After the copy, you cannot preview the settings before transmission. COPY JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list.
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS PROGRAMS Programs are set from the base screen of normal mode. EASY MODE (page 3-3) Programs cannot be stored in easy mode. STORING A PROGRAM This function collectively stores copy settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For information about how to retrieve a program, see "RETRIEVING A PROGRAM (page 3-143)".
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored Set reduction from A3 (11" x 17") to A4 (8-1/2" x 11") Retrieve the stored program. Change the exposure setting. Tap the [Start] key. Set 2-sided copying. Set margins. Set punch hole settings. Tap the [Start] key. Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each month because the above settings must be selected.
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 4 Program Name Cancel Characters Space OK Symbols Set a name for the program and tap the [OK] key. A registration completion message appears. AltGr Select whether or not the program will be added to the home screen or the favourites. 5 To specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the soft keyboard. You can also print serial number and account job ID.
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM This section explains how to delete copy settings in a program and rename a program. A program that is already stored cannot be deleted. Deleting a program 1 2 Tap [Call Program] on the action panel. Change Name Tap [Delete] on the action panel. Delete Register in Favorite Register for Home 3 Tap the key of the program you want to delete, and tap [Delete]. Renaming a program 1 2 Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.
PRINTER PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 macOS ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINTER INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE (PAGE INTERLEAVE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (USE DRIVER TO RENDER JPEGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINTER►PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE PRINTER FUNCTION To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed. See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment. WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Printer driver type PCL6 The machine support the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 printer control languages. PS • This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language developed by Adobe.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory application in Windows. • The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application. • The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Select print settings. 3 (1) Click the [Main] tab. (1) (2) Select the original size. • You can register up to seven user-defined sizes in the menu. To store an original size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User1] to [User7] from the menu, and click the [OK] button. • To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab and then select the settings.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP The printer driver settings screen consists of 9 tabs. Click a tab to select the settings on that tab. You can check information on each of the settings in the Help screen. Click the [Help] button at the bottom right of the screen. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) Tabs: Click to change the tabs shown. •[Main]: Frequently used functions are grouped on this tab.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (6) Print image This lets you visually check how the current settings affect the print image. Finishing settings are indicated by icons. (7) Machine image This shows the options that are installed on the machine, and the paper trays and output trays that are used. (8) [Help] button Displays the Help window of the printer driver. • Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. • If you have configured "Printing Policy" on the [Configuration] tab so that user authentication is always performed, users are required to be authenticated for each print job.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 2 Enter your user information. (1) (1) Click the [Job Handling] tab. (2) Enter your user information. (2) (3) (4) • When authentication is performed by login name, select [Login Name] and enter your login name. • When authentication is performed by login name/password, click [Login Name/Password] and enter your login name and password.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as Favorite. Saving frequently used settings or complex settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to use them. Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT USING SAVED SETTINGS You can specify the saved favorites through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated settings to your printing. 1 Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] button. The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application. Select favorite settings.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS You can change the default settings of the printer driver. Changes you have made in the printer driver properties window when you execute printing from the application are returned to the default settings specified here when you exit the application. 1 Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Printers & scanners].
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT SHARE FAVORITE SETTINGS BETWEEN SERVER AND CLIENT When using this machine as a shared printer, if "Favorite" is set in the printer driver of the shared server, this setting can also be used on the shared destination. When "Share Favorites" is enabled... Server Client The favorite settings configured on the server can be used on the client computer. Configure the following settings in the printer driver of the shared server.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory application "TextEdit" in macOS. • To install the printer driver and configure settings in a macOS environment, see the Software Setup Guide. • The explanations of screens and procedures for use in a macOS environment generally assume that macOS 11 is being used and a PPD driver is installed.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT Select print settings. 4 (1) (1) Make sure that the correct printer is selected. (2) Select an item from the menu and configure the settings as needed. (3) Click the [Print] button. (2) (3) SELECTING THE PAPER This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings in the print settings window.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application. In the application, select [Print] from the [File] menu.
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A macOS ENVIRONMENT 2 Enter your user information. (1) (1) Make sure that the machine's printer name is selected. (2) Select [Job Handling]. (3) Click the [Authentication] tab. (4) Enter your user information. (2) (3) (4) (5) • When authentication is carried out using the login name/password, enter your login name in "Login Name" and your password (1 to 32 characters) in "Password".
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE RESOLUTION The following three selections are available for "Print Mode" (resolution): 600 dpi This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table. 600 dpi (High Quality) The print quality of photos and text are high. 1200 dpi Select this mode to print photos with higher definition, and to print fine lines clearly. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select "Print Mode".
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 2-SIDED PRINTING The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. 2-sided printing also helps conserve paper. Paper orientation Print results Long Edge Short Edge Short Edge Long Edge Portrait Landscape The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the left or right side. The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the top.
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Layout]. (2) Select [Long-Edge binding] or [Short-Edge binding].
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER This function automatically enlarges or reduces the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine. This function is convenient when enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document. The following example explains how to print a Letter (or A4) size document on A3 (or ledger) size paper.
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Check the paper size for the print image (for example: A4). (2) Select [Paper Handling]. (3) Select [Scale to fit paper size]. (4) Select the actual paper size to be used for printing (for example: A3). When you select A0 (Fit to Page), A1 (Fit to Page), A2 (Fit to Page), B1 (Fit to Page), B2 (Fit to Page), or B3 (Fit to Page) in "Paper Size", the selected paper size will be selected after the "Suggested Paper" in "Destination Paper Size".
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE This function reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. You can print only the first page in the original size and print multiple reduced pages on the subsequent sheets. For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) or [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) is selected, the following print results will be obtained, depending on the selected page order.
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Select the number of pages per sheet. (3) Select the order of the pages. (4) If you wish to print borderlines, click the [Border] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. • To print the first page normally (as a cover), select the [N-Up with cover] checkbox ( ).
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES If the scanned original contains blank pages, the blank pages are skipped during printing. The machine detects blank pages and does not print them. This eliminates unnecessary printing without you having to check for blank pages before printing. Blank page Do not print blank pages Print This function is available in a Windows environment.
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUT STAPLE FUNCTION The staple function staples the output. To create materials with more sophisticated appearance, the staple function can be used in combination with 2-sided printing. This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS • An inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the staple function. • An inner finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the stapleless staple function.
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select the staple function or the punch function. • For the staple function, select the number of staples in the "Staple" menu. • For the punch function, select the type of punch in the "Punch” menu. Use [Force Letter-R for Letter Size] to always use letter size paper in landscape orientation.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet. If a saddle stitch finisher is installed and if "Booklet" and "Staple" are selected, this function automatically folds and outputs the copies.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS If a saddle stitch finisher is installed (4) (5) (4) Click the [Finishing] tab. (5) Select [Saddle Stitch] from "Staple". When a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed and the job is not output correctly with [Saddle Stitch], select [Saddle Stitch (Reverse)]. macOS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select [Saddle Stitch]. (4) Select [Tiled] or [2-Up].
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS TRIMMING THE EXCESS OF FOLDED PAPER If a trimmer unit is installed, you can trim off excess edges of paper for a finer finish. Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Click the [Trimming] button. (3) Set the [Trimming] checkbox to , and specify "Trimming Width".
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Trimming]. (2) Set the [Trimming] checkbox to . (3) Specify the trimming width.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING (MARGIN) This function shifts the print image to increase the margin at the left, the right, or the top of the paper. If a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed, the staple and punch functions of the machine can also be used together. This is convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output but the binding area overlaps the text.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select "Margin Shift".
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CREATE A LARGE POSTER (POSTER PRINTING) One page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper (2 sheets (1 x 2), (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets (3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster. To enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during attachment, borderlines can be printed or overlapping edges can be created (overlap function). This function is available in a Windows environment.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY (PRINT POSITION) This function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (3) (4) (2) (5) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Custom].
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch holes). ABCD ABCD Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select [Portrait (Rotated)] or [Landscape (Rotated)] in "Orientation". macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Layout].
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE (ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE) This function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing an image. When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set the width and length percentages separately to change the proportions of the image. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Main] tab.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%). (2) Click the [OK] button.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS (WIDTH) Adjusting line widths used in data such as CAD This function increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications. When the data includes lines of varying widths, you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Thickening fine lines in Excel When fine border lines in Excel do not print correctly, you can make the lines thicker. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. • Normally this setting is not necessary. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select the [Thicken Fine Lines] checkbox ( ).
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Adjusting the thickness of text and lines You can make text and lines thicker. You can also make edges smoother or sharper. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Specify the settings. Item Text/Line control Description Text You can make characters and text thicker. Graphics Text+Graphics Text+Graphics+Photo Text/Line Knockout control Text You can make knockout text and lines thicker.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Item Image Enhancement Description Auto Off Sharp Text Text+Graphics Text+knockout text Text+Graphics+ knockout text Text+Graphics+ knockout Soft Text Text+Graphics Text+knockout text Text+Graphics+ knockout text Text+Graphics+ knockout 4-43 You can make the edges of text and graphics smoother or sharper. Auto: Perform optimal image enhancement. Off: No image enhancement is applied. Sharp: Image enhancement is applied sharply.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Advanced2]. (3) Specify the settings.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE (MIRROR-IMAGE REVERSE/VISUAL EFFECTS) The image is reversed to create a mirror image. This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium. B B In a Windows environment, this function is only available when using the PS printer driver. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select [Horizontal].
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS IMAGE MODE ADJUSTING FUNCTION ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (IMAGE ADJUSTMENT) This function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed. This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (2) (3) (3) (4) (4) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK (TEXT TO BLACK/VECTOR TO BLACK) When printing a color image in grayscale, text and lines that are drawn in faint colors are printed in black. This function allows you to bring out color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in grayscale. ABCD ABCD • Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted. • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS SELECTING IMAGE SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE Preset settings are available in the machine's printer driver for various uses. Graphics mode Select the graphics mode from "Raster" or "Vector". Bitmap compression The data compression ratio of bitmap is set. If the ratio is higher, the image quality becomes lower. Screening Select the screening to modify the image to suit specific preferences, according to the appropriate image processing method.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Image Quality]. (3) Specify the settings.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS TO COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES (WATERMARK) CO NF ID EN TI A L This function adds faint shadow-like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image. The size and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the list. When necessary, you can enter text to create an original watermark. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Watermarks]. (2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure watermark settings. • Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text. • Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar .
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA (IMAGE STAMP) This function prints a bitmap or JPEG image stored on your PC over the print data. This function prints a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data. The size, position, and angle of the image can be adjusted. MEMO MEMO This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE This function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Custom Image Registration] button. (3) Select the registration type and name of the custom image.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA (OVERLAYS) This function overlays data on a fixed form you have prepared. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame in an application different from that of the text file and registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print result can be easily obtained without the need for complex manipulations.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • When printing is started, a confirmation message will appear. The overlay file will not be created until the [Yes] button is clicked. • When you click the [Open] button, the existing overlay file is registered. Printing with an overlay file (2) (3) (1) Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for printing with an overlay file. (2) Click the [Stamp] tab. (3) Select an overlay file.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADDING THE NUMBER OF COPIES (COPIES STAMP) You can add the number of copies to the header or footer of the print data. You can also set a copies number and print position. This function is available in a Windows environment. (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the [Copies Stamp] button. (3) Select the settings, and click the [OK] button.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER) In a Windows environment The front and back covers and specified pages of a document are printed on paper that is different from the other pages. Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper, or insert colored paper or a different paper type at specified pages.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Covers/Inserts] from [Inserts Option], and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the paper insertion settings. • Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing method from the corresponding menus. • Click the [Add] button and your settings will appear in "Information". • When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "Favorites" to save the settings.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Covers]. (3) Select the cover insertion settings. Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the front and back covers.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) When transparency film is used for printing, this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparency film is also printed on the corresponding sheet of inserted paper. A B C Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS (5) (7) (6) (5) Click the [Inserts] tab. (6) Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the [Settings] button. (7) Select the transparency insert settings. When the [Printed] checkbox is selected to set to , the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed. Set the paper type of the tray 4 or bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film into the tray 4 or bypass tray.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Transparency Inserts] in "Feature Sets". (3) Select the transparency insert settings. When [On (Printed)] is selected from "Transparency Inserts", the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed. Set the paper type of the tray 4 or bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film into the tray 4 or bypass tray.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES You can insert separator pages between jobs or the specified number of copies. Job 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 Job 2 2 3 3 1 Job 1 Job 2 2 3 This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Click the [Separator Page] button.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY) This function prints an additional copy of the print image on paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray. For example, if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and colored paper is loaded into tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy slip is obtained with a single selection of the print command.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB SHIFT/TAB PAPER PRINT) There are two methods of printing on the tabs of tab paper: "Tab Shift" and "Tab Paper Print". Tab Shift Create the text to be printed on tab paper in an application, and set the test shifting distance in [Print Position] on the [Layout] tab of the printer driver property window. The text will be printed on the tabs.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows Tab Shift When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on tab papers in an application, take the following steps: (1) (6) (3) (4) (5) (2) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Tab Shift]. (4) Specify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the button. (5) Click the [OK] button. (6) Select the paper source and type.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only) Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings. (3) (1) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Tab Paper] from “Inserts Option”, and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the tab position settings. For commercially available tab paper, use the existing settings such as [A4-5tab-D] in "Favorites".
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE (CHAPTER INSERTS) This function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper. When you specify a page (such as a chapter cover page) to be printed on the front side of the paper, it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper. Example: When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FOLDING PAPER FOR PRINTING (FOLD) If a folding unit is installed, print paper can be folded. For example, if A4 (8-1/2" × 11") and A3 (11" × 17") size print images are mixed, you can fold A3 (11" × 17") size paper to the A4 (8-1/2" × 11") size to adjust the width of the actual print paper to the A4 (8-1/2" × 11") size. When necessary, you can staple folded sheets. To use the Half Fold and Saddle Fold (Staple) functions, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Folding types Print Side Fold Orientation Folding results Description Open Right ABC AC Open Left ABC AC Inside C-Fold Open Right ABC Open Left ABC C For example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet. A Outside - Open Right CA ABC AC ABC AC Accordion Fold - Open Left 4-70 For example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Folding types Print Side Fold Orientation Folding results Description Open Right ABCD AD Open Left ABCD AD Inside Double Fold Open Right ABCD DA Open Left ABCD DA For example, paper is folded in four so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • When printing data in a pamphlet layout, the "Booklet" function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet. See "CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) (page 4-29)". • The Fold function cannot be used together with the Punch and Staple functions.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows Folding (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Select the folding method in "Fold", and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the desired folding method. Folding (Z-Fold) (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Select the folding method in "Z-Fold", and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the paper to be folded and choose the opening direction. If you select "Z-Fold", set the checkbox of the paper size for paper folding to 4-73 .
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS Folding (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Folding]. (3) Select the desired folding method. Folding (Z-Fold) (1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features], then select [Folding(Z-Fold)]. (2) Configure Fold settings.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE (PAGE INTERLEAVE) This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing. You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left-hand page and a memo space on the right-hand page. Pre-set data • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. You have to create page data to be inserted in advance.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT) This function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the repeat count in "N-Up".
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) This function prints pattern data such as "DO NOT COPY" behind the print data. If paper with pattern data is duplicated, the pattern data emerges in the background, which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorized document copying. PY AB CD AB CD O TC O ’N DO PY O TC O ’N DO • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • "Hidden Pattern" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorized printing. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage. • Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In "Settings (administrator)", select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] → [Contrast] if this is the case.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (USE DRIVER TO RENDER JPEGS) In some situations, a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly. This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered. When you print an original containing JPEG images, this function allows you to select whether the images are rendered in the printer driver or the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS MAXIMIZING THE PRINT AREA ON THE PAPER (PRINT AREA) By maximizing the print area, you can print on the full paper size. This function is available in a Windows environment. Even when the print area is maximized, edges may be cut off. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. Click the [Other Settings] button. Select [Maximum] from the "Printable Area". Click the [OK] button.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB (TANDEM PRINT) To use this function, two machines that can perform tandem printing are required. Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a large print job in parallel. This function reduces the printing time when you handle a large number of prints.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Select [On] in "Tandem Print". The tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using "Custom Installation" with [LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)] selected and with the [ ] checkbox selected for "Do you want to use Tandem Print function?".
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (DOCUMENT FILING) This function stores a print job as a file on the machine's local drive, allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed. The location for storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from being mixed together with files of other users. • Hold Only This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's local drive without printing it.
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Job Handling] tab. (2) Select the function from the "Document Filing". (3) Select the folder for storing the file in “Stored to”. To enter a password (4 to 8 digit number), click the [PIN Code] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. To create a public PDF for PC browsing, select the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox ( ). • When [Quick File] is selected, "Document Filing" will be set to [Hold After Print].
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS macOS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Select [Job Handling]. (2) Select [Retention]. (3) Select how to save the print data in "Document Filing". If necessary, you can enter a password (4 to 8-digit number). (4) Select the folder to store the file in "Stored To". If you selected [Custom Folder], enter the name of the custom folder where you want to save the file. • When [Quick File] is selected, "Document Filing" will be set to [Hold After Print].
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATA When user authentication is enabled on the machine, all document filing (stored) print jobs of the user who logs in are automatically printed. After all jobs are printed, the stored jobs are deleted. To use the Print All function, the following steps are necessary: • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Authentication Settings] → [Default Settings] and enable [Automatically print stored jobs after login].
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLY This function prints data created in an application from the machine and simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine. This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver. • Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine. For more information, see "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 6-19)".
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES When you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver. The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 4 Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel. • When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel. • The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed. • The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the FTP server. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY Files in a USB memory device connected to the machine are printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC, you can copy a file into a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly. • Use FAT32, NTFS or exFAT format for USB memory device.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 4 Select the print conditions. 5 Tap the [Start] key. • If you have selected multiple files in step 3, you can select only the number of prints. • If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 3, the print conditions in the file will be given priority. Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. Remove the USB memory device from the machine.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER PRINTING A FILE IN THE NETWORK FOLDER YOU HAVE CONFIGURED IN THE MACHINE'S SETTINGS 1 2 3 Tap the [File Retrieve] key. Tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel. Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder.] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 5 6 Select the print conditions. • If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints. • If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 4, the print conditions in the file will be given priority. Tap the [Start] key. Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Referring to the network folder path 1 Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access in step 3 of “PRINTING A FILE IN THE NETWORK FOLDER YOU HAVE CONFIGURED IN THE MACHINE'S SETTINGS (page 4-92)". Workgroup Workgroup Name WorkGroup1 WorkGroup2 WorkGroup3 WorkGroup4 WorkGroup5 WorkGroup6 2 Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to access. 3 Tap the key of the network folder that you wish to access.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER SUBMIT PRINT JOB By selecting [Document Operations] → [Submit Print Job] from "Settings (Web version)" and specifying a file, you can directly print the file without using the printer driver. In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC, such as a file on another PC connected to the same network.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER FTP PRINT You can print a file from your PC by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine. Performing FTP print Enter the IP address of this machine in the server name field of your FTP client application to connect to this machine. When you upload the file you want to print in the "Ip" folder on the FTP server of this machine, printing will start automatically.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Performing e-mail print Using your PC's e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in "Address" and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed. Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format. Commands are entered in the format "command name = value" as shown in the following example.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Universal Print Universal Print is a service that allows data from users and computers connected to Microsoft 365 to be printed on MFPs and printers via the Universal Print service operated by Microsoft. With Universal Print, MFPs and printers can be centrally monitored and configured using Azure Active Directory, rather than having to install a printer server and install printer drivers on each user's computer. monitoring and configuration.
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Universal Print Settings This function allows you to register or remove the device from the Azure Active Directory, check the current registration status, or enable or disable the Universal Print function. To register with Azure Active Directory, launch the setting mode from your web browser.
PRINTER►PRINTER JOBS PRINTER JOBS CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a printer job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read "STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 6-19)".
PRINTER►PRINTER JOBS CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine. If paper of the desired size is not immediately available, you can use paper that is set in a different tray.
PRINTER►PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION When there are multiple machines that support the print release function on the same network, you can use the print release function to save data in the machine that is set as the primary unit and then print the saved data from secondary unit which you set (multiple secondary units can be set). INTER-GROUP PRINTING Primary and secondary units can be grouped.
PRINTER►PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION BEFORE USING THE PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION This section explains settings that must be configured before you can use the Print Release function. Settings required on the machine To use the print release function, configure in setting mode (administrator). Fixing the IP address of the machine If the machine is used in a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may change. If this happens, you will not be able to send print release information to the machine.
PRINTER►PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION USING THE PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION This section explains how to store jobs in the primary unit, and how to select and print jobs from a secondary unit. Storing a job in the primary unit from your computer When user authentication enabled in the machine, you must enter your user information (login name, password, etc.) in the settings screen of the printer driver in order to print.* For explanations of the settings, see “PRINTER FUNCTION (page 4-3)".
PRINTER►PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION 4 Start printing. In a macOS environment 1 2 In the application, select [Print] from the [File] menu. Make sure that the machine's printer name is selected. (3) (1) (2) Configure the print release function. (1) Select [Job Handling]. (4) (2) Click [Retention]. (3) Select the [Print Release] checkbox . (4) Click [Authentication] and enter your user information as needed. If user authentication is not enabled, this step can be omitted.
PRINTER►PRINT RELEASE FUNCTION Printing/deleting a job stored in the primary unit from a secondary unit This section explains how to print and delete a stored job from a secondary unit. 1 Tap the [Print Release] key on the Home screen. • A list of the jobs stored in the primary unit appears. • If the main power of the primary unit is not on, a message will appear and you will not be able to view the stored jobs. 2 A User1 Select Job to Operate. File Name Print or delete the selected job.
PRINTER►APPENDIX APPENDIX PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST For information on the setting items, refer to printer driver Help. PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP (page 4-6) The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and macOS PS vary depending on the operating system version and the application.
PRINTER►APPENDIX Finishing Function PCL6 PS Windows PPD macOS PS Staple/Saddle Stitch Yes Yes Yes Yes Punch Yes Yes Yes Yes Fold Yes Yes Yes Yes Offset Yes Yes Yes Yes Output Yes Yes Yes Yes Separator Page Yes Yes No Yes Trimming Yes Yes No Yes • Staple/Punch: If a finisher or a saddle stitch finisher is installed (The punch module is also required in order to use the punch function.) • Fold: If a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
PRINTER►APPENDIX Inserts Function PCL6 PS Windows PPD macOS PS Covers/Inserts Yes Yes Yes Yes Transparency Inserts Yes Yes No Yes Carbon Copy Yes Yes No No Tab Paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Covers/Inserts (Windows PPD/macOS PS): Only covers can be inserted.
PRINTER►APPENDIX Function PCL6 PS Windows PPD macOS PS PS Pass-Through No Yes No Yes Job Compression No Yes No Yes Tandem Print Yes Yes No No Disable Blank Page Print Yes Yes No No Custom Image Registration Yes No No No • Input Resolution Yes Yes No No • Shade Pattern Yes No No No • Spool Data Format Yes Yes No No • Printable Area Yes Yes No No • Rip Style Yes Yes No No • Duplex Style Yes Yes No No • Job Name Shortening Yes Yes No No • Use dr
PRINTER►APPENDIX SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER You can enter a billing code using the printer of the machine. For an overview of a billing code, refer to "BILLING CODE (page 9-25)". Enable billing code This setting is required only in the Windows environment. (Always usable under macOS environment) 1 Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers]. • In Windows 11, click the [Start] button, select [Bluetooth & devices] → [Printers & scanners].
PRINTER►APPENDIX Windows When printing starts, the billing code setting screen appears. Enter the main code and sub code, and click the [OK] button. To retain the specified billing code, set [Always Use This Billing Code] to . • You can click [Get Billing Code] to get the machine's billing code list and select the billing code from the list. • If you have started printing without specifying a billing code, a use code is recorded in the job log. macOS (1) (2) (1) Select [Billing Code].
PRINTER►APPENDIX AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON When the user authentication is used, you must enter your user name and password to print from a printer driver. The Single Sign-on function can be used when Active Directory authentication is used on both the machine and the computer. When you use this function and print from the printer driver, the print job is sent to the machine using the authentication information that you used to log in to the computer.
FACSIMILE RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTER (PC-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 DELETING A TRANSMISSION LOG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 SET THE SCANNING OF THE ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 AUTO DETECTION. . . . . . . . .
FACSIMILE ASSUMING A SPECIFIC USAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POLLING MEMORY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (POLLING MEMORY) . . . . . . . . . . . . RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS (POLLING SECURITY SETTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX To use the machine as a facsimile, connect the telephone line, and set the telephone line type. The facsimile expansion kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality. 1 Connecting to the telephone line.
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX 2 Make sure the main power switch is in the " " position. When the main power indicator is lit up, the main power is in the " " position. If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the main power switch to the " " position and press the [POWER] button on the operation panel.
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX Storing destination addresses for each scan mode in the address book. When using fax, it is convenient to previously store addresses in the address book. For how to use the address books and how to store addresses, see the following item.
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX MODE Fax mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most fax jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for fax. (1) (6) (7) (2) (8) (3) (9) (4) (1) Show the size of the placed original. (2) Select an address.
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX You can select these functions in easy mode. • SET THE SCANNING OF THE ORIGINALS (page 5-43) • CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page 5-55) • CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-56) • To select a function in easy mode In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Fax].
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX [R] KEY When the machine is connected to a PBX, the "PBX Setting" can be enabled to automatically connect to the outside line each time you dial normally. When the PBX setting is enabled, the [R] key appears in the base screen. To dial a number inside your PBX, touch the [R] key before dialling to temporarily cancel the "PBX Setting". In Easy mode In Normal mode OK R 1 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 # C • This Setting can only be activated in Germany.
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE This section explains the basic steps for sending a fax. Place the original. 1 2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Enter the destination fax number. Tap the numeric keys to enter the destination number directly, or search and retrieve the address book or number.
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX 3 Configure the settings. Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc. If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS Tap the [Direct Entry] key or [Fax Number] to enter the destination fax number. 1 If you want to specify multiple destinations, tap and enter the next fax number. If you enter an incorrect number, tap the [C] key to delete the number and re-enter.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK A destination fax number is retrieved by simply tapping the one-touch key of that destination on the address book screen. (One-touch dialling) It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by simply tapping the key. This dialling method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to (or poll) multiple fax destinations.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Tap a one-touch key of contact or group that includes the fax destination. OK Address 1 Sort A AAA D BBB G CCC M BBB P DDD Frequent Use • The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with frequent use, categories, indexes, and keywords. (In normal mode, you can narrow down the destinations by job type.) • Tapping [Sort] allows you to change the order of destinations displayed in the list. • When adding a destination, tap another one-touch key.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination (cancel selection of the destination) if necessary. Tap the All Destinations key. 1 2 All Destinations Confirm the destination. OK After the confirmation is completed, tap 1 AAA .
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION The search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change normal mode.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK If an LDAP server is configured in the setting mode (Web version), you can search for the desired destination in the global address book and obtain the fax number when performing a fax transmission. You can also add a retrieved address to the address book. However, addresses of the FTP/Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 4 Enter Initials Item Name Search Start Enter a keyword and tap the [Search Start] key. OK Target LDAP_SERVER_1_123456789 012345678901234567890 When you tap the keyword entry box, the soft keyboard appears. The search results will appear after a brief interval. Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. • If no destination is found: Tap the [Search Again] key. • To continuously add other destination: Tap the destination.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A MOBILE ADDRESS BOOK If the machine and mobile device are connected by Bluetooth, you can retrieve a destination from the mobile address book. Destinations for fax transmission and e-mail transmission can be retrieved. • The called address book is not saved in this machine. • The maximum number of addresses that can be read from the mobile address book is 2000.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Operate the mobile device to be connected to pair it with the machine. Please pair your device with this machine via Bluetooth. If this machine was previously paired Device name of the machine is displayed on the screen. with your device, delete it from the device and then pair it again. Device Name: AAA When pairing with a mobile device that has been paired with this unit before, delete the information of this unit stored in the mobile device.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log. In normal mode, you can also add an address in a transmission history to the address book.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Sending History OK Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial. Delete All Histories Select Address to Send Again. BBB The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. 00000000 AAA aaaaaaaa AAA aaaaaaaa BBB aaaaaaaaa DDD 66666666 To cancel the resend setting: Tap the highlighted key.
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Number sequences entered using the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialled as a single number. For example when dialling an international number, tap the [Pause] key between the identification number of an international telephone service company (e.g., "001") and the country code (e.g., "81" for Japan) to insert a pause for smoother line connection.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. SELECTING FAX MODE (page 5-7) FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are described below. Select the method that best suits your needs. To fax a large number of sheet originals: Use the automatic document feeder.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission) • When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled. WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS (page 5-27) • The line of the machine will be busy if another fax is being sent, received, or if the machine is in the busy state. • Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS ORIGINAL ORIENTATION When an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") original is placed in vertical orientation ( ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in horizontal orientation ( ) (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation ( ), it is transmitted in that orientation ( ) without being rotated.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED IMAGE If the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine's paper width. Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratios Transmitted image width Receiving machine's paper width Reduced size Scaling A3 (11" x 17") B4 B4 1:0.8 A3 (11" x 17") A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A4R 1:0.7 B4 A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A4R 1:0.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be attempted again automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the transmission will be cancelled. Wait for a brief period and then try sending the fax again. To cancel transmission: Do so from the job status screen.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX DEST. CONFIRMATION MODE This mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax is sent to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. Set it in setting mode. If a fax is sent while this function is enabled, an address confirmation message will appear when the [Start] key is tapped. The message that appears will vary depending on the method used to specify the destination. After tapping the [Speaker] key while "Fax Dest.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Destination specified using the numeric keys With "Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode" enabled, and "Require Re-entry when Directly Entering the Fax Destination" enabled Tap the [Start] key to display the confirmation message. Tap the [OK] key, re-enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap the [Enter Address] key. If the re-entered destination is correct, scanning will begin. If the re-entered destination is not correct, a message will appear.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original through the automatic document feeder and send the data by the memory transmission function.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS • Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS (page 5-30)". • When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number is recorded in the transaction report and image sending activity report and can be used to check fax jobs.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 3 Address Book Address Fax Number Global Address Search Exposure Auto 1 Resolution Super Fine 4 Original GHI Job Build PQRS 7 Slow Scan Mode 2 Recent Jobs 3 ABC DEF 5 Sending History 6 MNO JKL 8 Call Search Number 9 TUV WXYZ 0 # Heavy Paper Scan Direct TX C 4 CA Preview Send Size Scan Size Others Verification Stamp R Mixed Size Orig. Original Count Specify the destination fax number, and tap [Direct TX] on the action panel.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and send the data by the memory transmission function. • If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission will take place after fax reception is completed.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Tap the [Read-End] key. 5 A beep sounds. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. To cancel scanning: Tap the [CA] key before the [Read-End] key is tapped. • When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE Sending a scanned original without saving it in the machine's memory is called "Direct TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and directly send data. When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 4 Specify the destination fax number. • • • • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS (page 5-11) RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-12) USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-15) USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND (page 5-20) • Only one destination can be specified. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used. • The destination cannot be retrieved from a global address book.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialled and the connection is established. • If a person answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak. • When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory. • A destination that includes an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) You can send a fax to multiple destinations in a single operation when, for example, sending a report to branch offices in different regions. This function is called "Broadcasting". One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 1 2 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Specify all destinations.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations. Tap the job status display, and tapping the [Fax] tab. 1 2 Tap the [Complete] key.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTER (PC-Fax) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SET THE SCANNING OF THE ORIGINALS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document. For example, a 2-sided original can be scanned, and its front and back sides can be sent as 2 pages.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 2 Original OK Image Orientation Size Auto Duplex Setup 1-Sided Book Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap . Tablet To cancel 2-sided scanning: Tap the [1-Sided] key. In normal mode, tap the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided Tablet] key that has been forcibly displayed and cancel the display.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE When the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only. In Easy mode 1 2 Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Auto] key.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS In Normal mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 EASY MODE (page 5-6) Original Tap the [Scan Size] key. OK Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto A4 Auto 2-Sided Tablet A4 Image Orientation 2-Sided Booklet Oth 4 Tap the appropriate original size key. OK Scan Size After the settings are completed, tap .
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard, specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8"). When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified. In Easy mode 1 2 Tap the [Original] key.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS In Normal mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 EASY MODE (page 5-6) Original Tap the [Scan Size] key. OK Scan Size Auto Send Size A4 Auto 2-Sided Tablet A4 Image Orientation 2-Sided Booklet 4 Scan Size Tap the [Direct Entry] key, and enter the scan size.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Scan Size Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. OK Store/Delete Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size. To amend or delete a previously stored key: Tap the key that you want to amend or delete. The following screen will appear. • To amend the key, tap the [Amend] key and go to the next step. • To delete the key, tap the [Delete] key.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Retrieving a stored original size In Easy mode 1 2 Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Auto] key. Original OK Image Orientation Size Auto Duplex Setup 1-Sided 3 Tablet Tap the [Custom Size] key. OK Original size Auto Direct Entry Custom Size 4 Book A6R A5 B5R B4 A5R A4 A3 B5 A4R 216x343 Long Size 216x340 OK Custom size X420 Y297 Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve. Tap twice.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS In Normal mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab. EASY MODE (page 5-6) Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve. 4 After selecting the key of the original size, tap the key. Check that the specified size is displayed on the scan size screen. To cancel the operation Tap the [CA] key.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Original Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. OK Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto A4 2-Sided Tablet Auto A4 If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS CHANGING THE EXPOSURE The exposure can be changed to suit the darkness of the original. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when "Job Build" or "Preview Setting" in "Others" is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.) Exposure settings Exposure Suggestion Auto This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS CHANGING THE RESOLUTION The resolution can be specified to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and the darkness of the image. Resolution settings Resolution Suggestion Standard Select this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual). Fine Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FAX RECEPTION RECEIVING A FAX This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) RECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLY When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. • When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory transmission mode.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION The faxes are printed automatically. 2 When printing ends, the Information indicator turns off. If a PIN Code entry screen appears: A PIN Code is registered to print the received fax data. When the correct PIN Code is entered, the received fax is printed. PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) (page 5-60) How to check the fax reception mode You can check current fax reception mode in the system area at the top of the screen.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY A fax can be received manually using the touch panel (manually). • When answering the telephone by tapping the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the voice of the caller, but you will not be able to speak. • You can receive a fax after answering a call on an external telephone. Remote reception can also be used to receive a fax.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION PRINTING RECEIVED DATA PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a PIN Code must be entered. When this function is used, a PIN Code entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received. Received data is stored. Enter PIN code via the 10-key.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME You can start printing the received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. For example, if it is set to print data received during the day at 20:00, the received data will not be printed immediately, and printing will begin automatically at 20:00. • The printed data is automatically deleted from memory.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING Check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function can be used when "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled*. * The factory default setting is disabled.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 Received Data List All Received Data OK Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete Displays the received data image. File • Tap mode. Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting • To delete a received image, tap [Delete] on the action panel.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. CHANGING MODES (page 2-10) FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (FAX DATA FORWARD) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine. Store a recipient by selecting [Send Setting (page 10-92)] in Setting mode. If the machine has received data, the information indicator blinks in white.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 3 Tap the [Execute] key in [Forward Received Data] to begin forwarding. If a PIN Code entry screen appears, the "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled. Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to a fax address, Internet fax address, e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed. Configure all forwarding settings for received faxes in setting mode (Web version).
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen, and from specifying which table is used. To do so, set the checkboxes for the following items to . • Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disabling of Forward Condition Change Specify in [Print Style Setting] whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION When selecting senders from the "Sender Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key on your keyboard to select multiple senders. 9 Select the forwarding conditions. • To always forward received data, select [Always Forward]. • To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward received data only on specified days.] and select the checkbox ( ) of the desired day of the week.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 14 Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] in "Settings (Web version)". 15 From the forwarding table, select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on Forward Condition]. 16 From the forwarding table, select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.]. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 10.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S STORAGE (INBOUND ROUTING) Received faxes can be saved to the machine's storage. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (single) for the saved Internet faxes. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail. Received faxes are saved in the following directory: \\MFP\faxreceive • Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Settings for saving received faxes to the storage 1 In "Settings (administrator)", click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings] (administrator rights are required). • Data that can be saved are received faxes and received Internet faxes. Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 Received Data List All Received Data OK Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap [Forward to Other Address]. • Tap to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode. • Multiple sets of received data can be selected.
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION SAVING RECEIVED DATA You can save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. When data is received, 1 is shown at the top of the screen. Notification Machine Information Check Received Data.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS OTHERS FUNCTIONS COMMON FUNCTIONS The following functionality is the same as scanner functionality. For detailed explanations, see the explanation in the scanner/internet fax chapter.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS STORING FAX OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose that the same A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are distributed to branch offices in various regions once a month.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS • The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. • The following contents cannot be stored in programs: • Tapping the [Speaker] key, Quick File, File, page move and unspecified erase during preview, Metadata Entry, Send Settings, and Own Name Select. • Up to 48 programs can be stored. • Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS OPERATING FAX TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION REMOTELY This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING RECEPTION (POLLING) When you connect to another machine and receive a document from it, this is called "Polling". The document reception from another machine is called "Polling Reception". You can enter multiple destination numbers.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS 1 Enter the destination fax number. • • • • • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS (page 5-11) RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-12) USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-15) RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-16) USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND (page 5-20) • Multiple fax numbers can be entered (maximum of 500). • Polling will take place in the order that the multiple fax numbers were entered.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service. • Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function. • This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling). • The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS SENDER-RELATED FEATURES This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (FAX OWN NUMBER SENDING) Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number or destination name, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of each fax page you transmit.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS • To set the date and time: In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Clock Adjust]. • To store a sender name and sender fax number: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Own Name and Destination Set] → [Own Number and Name Set] → [Sender Data Registration]. When you use the Own Number Setting, always configure this information.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS 2 Enter the destination fax number. 3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Own Name Select] key.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS ASSUMING A SPECIFIC USAGE This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS To cancel the transaction report setting: Tap the [Do not Print] key. • The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows: • "Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails. • "Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails. • "Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report. • Set the [Print Original Image] checkbox to report.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS POLLING MEMORY FUNCTIONS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (POLLING MEMORY) Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling Memory". Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box). If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document. 1 Place the original. 2 Select settings for the original to be scanned and other functions.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS 7 Tap the [Once] key or [Unlimited] key to specify the number of times. 8 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. To repeat transmitting an original, tap the [Unlimited] key. After the settings are completed, tap and . • A preview of the image will appear in the touch panel when the original is scanned. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTIONS DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX Delete a document from the memory box (public box) when it is no longer required. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. 2 Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. 3 Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. 4 Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel. If you tap [Check Image] on the action panel, you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased. 5 Tap the [Yes] key.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-CODE COMMUNICATION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. EASY MODE (page 5-6) F-CODE COMMUNICATION This function allows the machine to communicate with other machines that also support F-code.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION How F-codes work A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received in the memory box of F-code communication in the receiving machine specified by the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving machine, reception will not take place. The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "Sub Address" and "Passcode".
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-CODE DIALLING When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is dialled. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) stored in the memory box in the other machine before you perform an F-code transmission. It is convenient to store an F-code (sub-address and passcode) together with the fax number in a one-touch key or group key.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES Send a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If necessary, the F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. It is convenient to store this function in a program. The F-code confidential transmission cannot be registered as a "Favourite" item. 1 2 Place the original.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION When an F-code confidential fax received, the fax is stored in the memory box specified by the F-code. To check received faxes, enter the PIN Code. • Confidential faxes are automatically given priority in the print job queue. • The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after being printed.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 6 Received Data List Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. Print All Received Data Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete Displays the received data image. To print the document, tap [Print] on the action panel.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the Polling setting: Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark. 2 Specify the destination. (1) Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys. (2) Tap the [Sub Address] key. Symbol "/" is entered. (3) Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys. (4) Tap the [Passcode] key. Symbol "/" is entered.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) configured in your machine. Otherwise, transmission will not take place.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 3 4 5 6 7 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Confidential Polling Memory Folder Name Times Public Box Once Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. Tap [Change Number of Times] on the action panel, and set the polling times. To erase the original after its transmission, tap the [Once] key. To repeat transmitting an original, tap the [Unlimited] key. Change the settings as necessary.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box. A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted. By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically. 1 2 3 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Confidential Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Delete the document stored in an F-code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document. No original can be deleted from the memory box during communication. 1 2 3 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES This function sends a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine relay the fax to multiple destination machines. When the destination machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the destination machines can help reduce telephone charges.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 1 2 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Specify the destination.
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received and stored in an F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the destination machines programmed in the memory box. Transmission to the destination machine takes place automatically.
FACSIMILE►USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE You can connect an existing telephone to the machine. The telephone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine. Connect the external telephone as shown below. After connecting an external telephone, configure the "External Telephone Setting" in setting mode (administrator).
FACSIMILE►USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTERNAL TELEPHONE (REMOTE RECEPTION) Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the external telephone. Dial [5], [*] and [*] buttons of the external telephone. If you are using a pulse line, set the extension to send tone signals.
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS FAX JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To confirm the fax job status, tap the mode display and select the fax. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read the following items:.
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS RETRY JOBS A retry job appears at the end of the job queue list. Transmission of the retry job starts according to the [Recall in Case of Line Busy] setting in "Settings". When the transmission is completed, the retry job moves to the completed job list and the status changes to "Send OK". RECEPTION JOBS WHEN THE INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS ARE ENABLED When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS Examples of messages that are printed in the result column Print Page Description Yes The transaction was completed normally. G3 Communication took place in G3 mode. ECM Communication took place in G3 ECM mode. SG3 Communication took place in Super G3 mode. Forward The received data was forwarded. No Response No response from the receiving party. Busy Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A MOBILE ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND. . . . . . . . 6-45 SENDING ONLY THE URL OF A SCANNED FILE TO A SCAN DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149 ADDING A SIGNATURE WHEN SENDING AN IMAGE (ELECTRONIC SIGNATURE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152 ENCRYPTING THE TRANSMITTED DATA (ENCRYPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-154 OTHER FUNCTIONS STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) . . . . . . . . 6-94 SCANNING AND SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION USES OF THE NETWORK SCANNER The network scanner allows you to create an image file from the original data scanned by the machine, and send the file over a network to a PC, FTP server, or other destinations. If necessary, it scans the original using a TWAIN-compliant application on your PC.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Data entry mode In data entry mode, information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine is sent to a directory on an FTP server or an application on a PC as a metadata file in XML format. Installing the application integration module is required to use the metadata delivery function. The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER 4 Configure settings required in the setting mode. Configure server settings, default settings for the network scanner, and settings for Internet Fax. • To configure server settings: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Services Settings]. (Administrator rights are required.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER STORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool Lite must be installed. To scan an image to your computer, Network Scanner Tool Lite must be running on your computer. For information on how to obtain and install Network Scanner Tool Lite, see the following URL. https://global.sharp/products/copier/products/nst_lite/tips/index.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER NETWORK SCANNER MODE Network scanner mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most image send jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for network scanner mode.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Original A4 (1) Address E-mail Address Detail Original Resolution File Format Auto 200x200dpi Blank Page Skip PDF Off PDF CA (1) Preview Auto Set Recent jobs B/W Start Colour Start Select the function you want to use. You can select these functions in easy mode.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for network scanner. This section explains the keys on a base screen, taking as an example the E-mail base screen. Several methods are available in the Image Send mode, including Scan to E-mail and Scan to FTP. The base screen layout slightly differs depending on how image is sent.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER IMAGE SEND SEQUENCE First, to place the machine in a desired image send mode, tap the appropriate icon in the Home screen. CHANGING MODES (page 2-10) Place the original. 1 2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Enter the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER 3 Select functions. Specify the original scan size, exposure, file format, and other items. If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER If paper misfeeds in the automatic document feeder 2 patterns can be set. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Quick On Line Sending]. • If enabled When an original misfeeds, scanning stops, and scanned data up until that point is sent.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES For information on the original sizes that can be loaded, see "AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34)" and "DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39)". THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan Size" on the based screen.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER ADDRESS BOOK "Contacts" and "Group" can be stored in the address book. For a contact, more than one address can be stored, including fax, e-mail, Internet fax and direct SMTP addresses. Registering addresses stored as "Contacts" as well as directly entered addresses as "Group" enables you to easily send messages to multiple destinations simply by specifying a group.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN To display the address book, tap the [Address Book] key on the base screen in image send mode such as fax, e-mail, or Internet fax. You can also display it by tapping the [Address Book] icon in the home screen. "Contacts" and "Group" registered are enabled for alphabetical search and selected condition-based advanced search.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER SELECTING "Contacts" OR "Group" Tap a "Contacts" or "Group", and the tapped "Contacts" or "Group" is selected. After selection, tap . To add "Contacts" and "Group", refer to the following.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Narrowing by frequent Use Tap the [Frequent Use] key and select an address in the screen that appears. Addresses registered as "Frequent Use" addresses are shown. Narrowing by category Tap the [Category] key to select a category on the screen that appears. The "Contacts" and "Group" in the selected category appear on a list. The narrowed-down condition is displayed under the [Category] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Narrowing by index Search by alphabet to narrow down addresses. For example, tap "A" on the index bar to display "Contacts" stored with search text starting with "A". Narrowing by keyword Tap to display a search screen. Select a target for search, enter a keyword and then tap the [Search Start] key. The search results are listed. For example, if [Item] is [Name], search with a keyword "SH" lists contacts and groups starting with "SH".
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY Store new names or addresses in the address book by directly entering them. 1 In the address book screen, tap [Add New] on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon in the home screen. Enter basic information. 2 Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH Store the results of searching the global address book as new addresses in the address book. Global address search requires an LDAP server.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Select the server from the list of servers. 4 If an authentication screen appears, enter your user name and password, and tap the [OK] key. After selecting a server, tap . Tap the entry field to enter the search condition and then tap the [Search Start] key. 5 To change the search target, tap select [Name] or [Address]. 6 Select one address from the search result list, and tap the for [Item]. You can key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS As a new registration, add an address you have entered via fax or image send operations to the address book. FTP and desktop addresses cannot be stored in the address book from transmission logs. 1 In fax or image send mode, tap [Sending History] on the action panel.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER 5 Tap the [OK] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER STORING GROUPS Register "Group" by selecting addresses from those already stored as "Contacts". In this case of registration, only reference to addresses already stored takes place, and so, the total number of registered addresses (maximum 6000) in the address book does not increase. You can also directly enter a new address for a "Group".
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Tap the address to be registered in the "Group", and then tap the key. 5 You can select more than one address. 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to register addresses. After address registration is completed, tap key. 7 Tap the [Register] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER EDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOK You can edit or delete "Contacts" or "Group" information stored in the address book as well as addresses listed under "Contacts" and "Group". EDITING/DELETING CONTACTS AND GROUPS 1 In the address book screen, select a contact or group you wish to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. To delete a "Contacts" or "Group", tap [Delete] on the action panel.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER EDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES 1 Select a contact or group you wish to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. In the address book screen, select the contact or group that has the address you want to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. Only one contact or group can be selected. If more than one is selected, the [Edit] key does not appear. Tap the address display in the list of addresses. 2 To delete an address, tap the key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS "Contacts" and "Group" stored in the address book can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access. If no publicity scope is specified, stored "Contacts" and "Group" are publicized to all users. User authentication is required to set the scope for publicizing "Contacts" and "Group".
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER If you have logged in as the administrator, select any user name desired from the user list. To register a user: In "Settings (administrator)", select [User Control] → [User Settings] → [User List] → [Add]. DELETING THE TRANSMISSION HISTORY You can delete the fax or image send transmission history. The transmission history is deleted in normal mode. DELETING A SELECTED HISTORY 1 Tap the history you want to delete.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER REGISTER AN ADDRESS BOOK IN THE WEB PAGE Address Book Transmission destinations (contacts) such as fax and Scan to E-mail addresses, and groups of transmission destinations, can be stored in the address book. In setting mode, a list of stored contact and group information is displayed. To edit a contact or group, select the name of the contact/group. To add a new contact or group, click the [Add] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Item Description Internet Fax Internet Fax Address To store a new address, select [New Address] and enter the address in the address entry field. Global Address Search To search for an address stored as a global address, click this key and select the address from the list. Compression Mode Set the compression format used for transmitted images.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Item Description Desktop Desktop Destination To add a new address, select [New Address] and enter the address in [Hostname or IP Address]. Port Number Enter the port of the destination computer. Process Directory Specify the directory to which the data is be to sent. File Type* Select the file format used for a scanned image. Black & white: Select the compression format used for saving black & white images.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK In the address book screen, simply tap the one-touch key of a registered destination to retrieve the destination. If necessary, store multiple destinations in a one-touch key. Tapping the key will retrieve all the stored destinations. The address book screen shows all destinations used in each mode.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Tap the one-touch key of contact or group that has a destination. OK Address Sort AAA • The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories, frequent use, indexes, and keywords. (In normal mode you can narrow down by job type.) • Tapping the [Sort] key allows you to change the order of destinations displayed in the list. • When adding a destination, tap another one-touch key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS MY ADDRESS My Address is the user's own e-mail address, and is the e-mail address that has been registered in the user list. My Address can be used when login by login name / password is enabled in user authentication. Use this address when you want to send a scanned image to your own e-mail address. In E-mail mode, [Find My Address] appears on the action panel to let you immediately find and use My Address.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination). 1 Tap the [Address Review] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION The search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. EASY MODE (page 6-7) Address Book Address Global Address Search Touch to input Address Recent Jobs Subject File Name Tap [Call Search Number] on the action panel.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY 1 In the base screen of a mode, tap [Text Box]. On the base screen of Internet Fax, tap [Text Box] to display the screen you want to select the address type. Tap either the [Internet Fax] or [Direct SMTP] key. In easy mode, only the e-mail addresses can be entered.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER 1 Address Entry Tap the [Browse] key in the network folder entry screen. OK Path Input to Folder • To directly enter a folder, tap the [Folder Path] box. The soft keyboard is displayed. • If a user name and password are required, check with the administrator of the server and enter the user name and password.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SELECTING A SUBFOLDER AS A DESTINATION If there is only one shared folder selected as the destination, tapping [Select a Subfolder] changes the destination to the subfolder. • If the destination is changed to a subfolder, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not take place. • If a selected destination is a group destination, this function cannot be used. • If [Send and Print] of the copy function is set, this function cannot be used.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK When an LDAP server is configured in the "Settings (Web version)", look up an address in a global address book and retrieve the destination address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses). In normal mode, you can add an address retrieved by searching to the address book. However, addresses of the FTP/Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 3 Enter Text Search Start Tap of [Item], and select an item to be searched from [Name] or [Address]. OK Target Item LDAP_SERVER_1_123456789 012345678901234567890 Name Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. How to search Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered letters.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A MOBILE ADDRESS BOOK If the machine and mobile device are connected by Bluetooth, you can retrieve a destination from the mobile address book. Destinations for fax transmission and e-mail transmission can be retrieved. • The called address book is not saved in this machine. • The maximum number of addresses that can be read from the mobile address book is 2000.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Operate the mobile device to be connected to pair it with the machine. Please pair your device with this machine via Bluetooth. If this machine was previously paired Device name of the machine is displayed on the screen. with your device, delete it from the device and then pair it again. Device Name: AAA Cancel When pairing with a mobile device that has been paired with this unit before, delete the information of this unit stored in the mobile device.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses), and/or fax are stored. Select one of these to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Sending History Tap the key of the destination to resend. OK Select Address to Send Again. AAA The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears, enter the information. aaaaaaaa To cancel the resend setting: Tap the highlighted key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SENDING ONLY THE URL OF A SCANNED FILE TO A SCAN DESTINATION When using Scan to E-mail, some originals and/or scan settings may result in a large file. When the file is large, there is a risk that the e-mail server may reject the file and it will not be sent. This function saves the scanned file on the machine's local drive, and sends an e-mail providing only the file's URL information to the recipient.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS Sending only a URL to the recipient Using easy mode When [Enable Send Destination Link as Default] is enabled in the settings (administrator), the scanned data is saved in the machine's local drive, and URL information is sent to the e-mail destination. When disabled, scanned data is sent by regular Scan to E-mail. This function enable/disable cannot be changed in the easy mode screen.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS • To use this function Configure in "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Send Destination Link Settings]. • To always use this function in easy mode Configure in "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Enable Send Destination Link as Default].
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE An image can be sent in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder). • If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. • When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 2 Specify the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place. • If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to step 6.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSION Change the subject, file name, reply-to, and body text when performing a scan transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text. • When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Address Book Address To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box. Touch to input Address Subject File Name Specified by System Settings Colour Mode Auto/Mono2 After the settings are completed, tap . • Tap the key of the file name from the list. • To directly enter the file name, tap the [Direct Entry] key. • A prompt is displayed in the file name. The prompt is changed according to the settings.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 9 Enter the body text. Pre-Set Select After the settings are completed, tap . • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key. • To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. OK Body Entry Clear All Edit To clear all entered text: Tap the [Clear All] key. When this key is tapped, the entire body of the message is erased immediately, not just the selected line. • Enter up to 1800 characters.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE Transmits a fax in Internet Fax mode. This procedure can also be used to perform a direct transmission by Direct SMTP. • If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. • When all originals have been scanned, the message "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 2 3 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of Internet Fax mode. SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODE (page 6-9) Specify the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. • If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved. • Tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE Tap a pre-set text key. 4 Subject Clear OK Direct Entry No.1 AAA No.2 BBB No.3 CCC No.4 DDD No.5 EEE To cancel the selection of the subject: Tap the [Clear] key. If you wish to directly enter the text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to open the soft keyboard. Enter the subject and tap the [OK] key. 5 To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box. Tap a pre-set text key. 6 After the settings are completed, tap Subject Clear .
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Pre-Set Select Enter the body text. OK Body Entry After the settings are completed, tap Clear All . • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key. • To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. Edit To clear all entered text: Tap the [Clear All] key. When this key is tapped, the entire body of the message is erased immediately, not just the selected line.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) Send the same scanned image to multiple scan, Internet fax, and fax mode destinations in a single operation. One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs. (For example, if broadcast transmission jobs with 450 destinations are already reserved, data can be broadcasted to up to 50 destinations.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 1 Place the original. 2 Specify all destinations. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key ([Start] key in normal mode) to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page at a time.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE When Internet Fax addresses are included When Internet Fax addresses are included in the destinations, the following restrictions apply. Colour Mode File format (file compression mode) Original Background Adjustment Fixed at black & white binary. Fixed at TIFF. Transmission will take place to all addresses using the same image width as Internet Fax. Cannot be set.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the image to those destinations. 1 2 Tap the job status display. Scan Print Job Fax Pages Set Time Address Enter Plural Selection Mode Internet Fax Status Back Tap the [Scan] tab or [Internet Fax] tab, and tap the [Complete] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending Details Back Number: Address Start Time 001 aaa@aaa.□□□ 10:05 07/07 Status 002 bbb@bbb.□□□ 10:05 07/07 Failed After tapping the [Failed] tab, tap [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] on the action panel to resend the image. All Destinations The steps to follow after [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] is tapped differ depending on whether or not document filing is used.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A PC (PC-I-FAX) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-I Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-I Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as an Internet fax.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE IMAGE SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL) The automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original. Scan transmission 2-Sided Original Front and reverse sides are scanned The settings on 2-sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed. • You cannot use 2-Sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (ENLARGE/REDUCE) When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. In normal mode, the size of the placed original is indicated as the "Scan Size", and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the "Send Size".
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only. In Easy mode 1 Tap the [Original] key. 2 Tap the [Auto] key. 3 Tap a key of the desired original size.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE In Normal mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. EASY MODE (page 6-7) 2 After tapping the [Original] key, tap the [Scan Size] key. 3 Tap the appropriate original size key. After the settings are completed, tap Y . Y If you are sending a long original, tap the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 1,000 mm (39-3/8") (the maximum height is 297 mm (11-5/8")).
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card or postcard, specify the original size using numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8"). When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified. In Easy mode 1 Tap the [Original] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap [OK] twice. On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key. To cancel the specified size settings: Tap the [Auto] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE In Normal mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 After tapping the "Scan Size" key, tap the [Direct Entry] key. 4 EASY MODE (page 6-7) Address Book Address Specify the original size.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. OK Scan Size Store/Delete Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size. To amend or delete a previously stored key: Tap the key that you want to amend or delete. The following screen will appear. • To amend the key, tap the [Amend] key and go to the next step. • To delete the key, tap the [Delete] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE Retrieving a stored original size In Easy mode 1 Tap the [Original] key. 2 Tap the [Auto] key. 3 Tap the [Custom Size] key. 4 Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve. Tap twice. On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key. To cancel the operation Tap the [CA] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE In Normal mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab. EASY MODE (page 6-7) Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve. 4 After selecting the key of the original size, tap the key. Check that the specified size is displayed on the scan size screen. To cancel the operation Tap the [CA] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. • The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the original image. OK Original Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto A4 2-Sided Tablet Auto If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE Optimum scanning is ensured by selecting exposure and original image type based on the original. • When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the exposure setting each time you change pages. • The contrast for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE In Scan mode or Data entry mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Exposure] key. 3 Tap the key assigned to the original type you wish to set based on the original type. 4 EASY MODE (page 6-7) Tap OK E-mail/Exposure Specify density of image to send. 1 3 to adjust the exposure. After the settings are completed, tap 5 .
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION Specify the resolution setting. How to select the resolution For normal text originals, 200 x 200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently legible. For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600 x 600 dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE Change the file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image at the time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can be changed. The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Greyscale] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately for each.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE Note the following when [PDF/High] is specified in the [Colour/Greyscale] file format. • When broadcasting to an address with [PDF/High] specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as Compact PDF files. • When broadcasting to an address with [PDF/High] and [PDF/Compact/U-Fine] specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as Compact PDF (Ultra Fine) files. • If [PDF/High] is specified, the resolution cannot be changed in the scanner mode.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 3 Tap the key of the desired file type. After the settings are completed, tap . When the [B/W] key is selected When the [Colour/Greyscale] key is selected OK File Format B/W TIFF OK File Format Color/ Colour/ Greyscale Grayscale XPS TIFF JPEG XPS PDF PDF/A-1a PDF/A-1b PDF PDF/A-1a PDF/A-1b DOCX XLSX PPTX DOCX XLSX PPTX RTF TXT(UTF-8) Prog. RTF TXT(UTF-8) Prog. When [Disabling of OCR] is set in the system settings.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE • This procedure cannot be used if [Disabling of OCR] is set in the system settings. Proceed to the next step. • When "Long Size" is selected for the original, [OCR] cannot be used. • Select the scanning language in the language settings. The following languages can be selected.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Tap the key of the desired file type. When the [B/W] key is selected When the [Colour/Greyscale] key is selected E-mail Processing time is dependent on the format. Color/Grayscale TIFF XPS PDF PDF/A-1a TXT(UTF-8) RTF DOCX XLSX Specified Pages per File Programmed B/W Color/Grayscale OCR OCR Setting PPTX E-mail Processing time is dependent on the format. B/W Encry.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 10 Tap the Compression key or Compression Ratio key. When the [B/W] key is selected File Format Processing time is dependent E-mail Compression Mode When the [Colour/Greyscale] key is selected OK File Format Processing time is dependent OK Compression Ratio OK E-mail OK Select [Reduce Colours] if the original is mainly text with few colours. None Low MH (G3) Reduce Colours Middle MMR (G4) High When [Disabling of OCR] is set in the system settings.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE The format for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings. ► Internet Fax Settings (page 10-108) CHANGING COLOUR MODE Change the colour mode used to scan the original. In Easy mode Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key when scanning the original.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Tap the [Greyscale] or [Mono2] key to set the B/W mode for automatic colour selection. Specify whether Mono2 or greyscale is used when scanning black and white originals. Note that if the file format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in greyscale. After the settings are completed, tap . The B/W mode can be set only when the [Auto] key is selected in the colour mode setting (step 3).
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SETTING SCAN SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY (Auto Set) To automatically set scan settings appropriate for the original, tap the [Auto Set] key in the base screen of Easy Mode. Original Original Resolution Auto Auto CA Detail Address E-mail Address A4 Preview Auto Set File Format PDF PDF Recent Jobs Blank Page Skip Auto B/W Start Colour Start The following functions are set automatically.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED Check the image that will be sent in the touch panel before transmission. You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen, you can send a better quality original to the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS Fax mode details cautions for functions such as N-Up Printing that have the same operating procedures as fax mode. STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS • The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. • The following contents cannot be stored in programs: • Quick File • File • Page changes and unspecified erases during preview • Reply to/Add 'Reply to' to Cc • Own Name • Sign E-mail • Encrypt E-mail • Up to 48 programs can be stored. • Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) Reduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent. For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 4 Specify the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) Scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original. B4(8-1/2" x 14") B4(8-1/2" x 14") A3(11" x 17") A3(11" x 17") This function can only be used with the combinations of original sizes as shown below.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. Otherwise, tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. Transmitted image Originals Front Transmission Example of an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size portrait scan transmission Back Example of an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size landscape scan transmission • If the scan size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key. OK Card Shot Y 54 Off ( 25~210 ) mm On ( 25~210 ) mm X 86 Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in Reset Fit to Send Size Size A4 • Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SIMULTANEOUSLY SCANNING MULTIPLE CARDS, RECEIPTS OR OTHER SMALL ORIGINALS TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (MULTICROP) This function automatically crops and scans multiple cards, receipts, or other small originals placed on the document glass to individual files. • This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the multiple originals that you want to scan on the document glass. DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Cautions when placing the originals • Up to 50 originals can be placed at once. • Separate the originals by at least 5 mm. • Available originals sizes are 40 to 297 mm in height and 40 to 432 mm in width. • If the shape of an original is not square or rectangular, the original may not be cropped correctly. 2 Keep the auto document feeder open, not closed.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning the originals. When scanning is completed, place the next originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the above step until you have scanned all originals, and then tap the [Read-End] key. When transmission is completed, a beep sounds. • Restrictions when multicrop is enabled The following restrictions apply when multicrop is enabled. Restricted items may change automatically in some cases.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A BUSINESS CARD, READING THE TEXT STRING, CREATING A FILE, AND SENDING THE FILE (BUSINESS CARD SCAN) (When OCR function is enabled in system settings) You can scan a business card, extract the name and telephone number from the text string read by OCR, and create and send a vCard or other file. • Business card scanning can be used, but only the image will be scanned and the business card information will not be scanned.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the multiple business cards that you want to scan in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass. You can scan business cards by setting them in the automatic document feeder. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Cautions when placing business cards • Up to 20 business cards can be placed at once. • Separate the business cards by at least 5 mm.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Specify the destination. 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Business Card Scan] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning the originals. When scanning is completed, place the next group of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the above step until you have scanned all originals, and then tap the [Read-End] key. When transmission is completed, a beep sounds. The image of the scanned business card is sent together with the VCard or CSV file set in File Format.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS File names The user can assign any file name to a file. When [Use Full Name on Card as the File Name] is enabled, the name on a scanned business card can be assigned as the file name. If you do not set a file name, the machine will assign an automatically generated file name. File name rules File names are assigned as follows in each setting. Setting User entry File name auto extraction Automatic generation File File name vCard User_0001.vcf User_0002.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING MULTIPLE PHOTOS AT ONCE TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (Image Crop) This function automatically scans photographs placed on the document glass to individual files. This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device. Settings (administrator) -"Image Send Settings"→"Scan Settings"→"Condition Settings"→"If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Specify the destination. 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Image Crop] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (JOB BUILD) This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass. Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 4 Specify the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 8 Tap the [Read-End] key. When in fax mode, if no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved. To change the time until automatic send: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Job Auto Start Time During Scanning].
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS SEPARATE PAGES SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN) The left and right sides of an original are scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to successively scan each page of a book or other bound document. When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS Place the original on the document glass. 1 DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) The page on this side is copied first. Centreline of original 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 OK Others Job Build Slow Scan Mode Heavy Paper Scan Mixed Size Original Original Count Erase Dual Page Scan Book Divide Card Shot Multicrop Business Card Scan Image Crop Timer Verif. Stamp Background Adjustment Original Skew Adjustment Blank Page Skip Drop Out colour Sharpness Contrast RGB Adjust Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Scan] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY (BOOK DIVIDE) The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order before transmission. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent. This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto]. • The document glass is not available for this function.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING COLOURS AND SHADING ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT) You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter. Adjust light areas in this way. Level [-] Level [+] [+] makes the background darker. [-] makes the background lighter. This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 2 3 4 Place the original.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed. OK Background Adjustment Adjust Original Background Darkness. Off -3 0 After the settings are completed, tap sequence. 3 On and [Back] key in Touch [+] darken background. Touch [-] erase background. To cancel the background adjustment setting: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (CONTRAST) This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Contrast] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 OK Contrast Off 1 2 3 4 5 On Low High Tap or slide the slider to adjust the contrast level. After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in To cancel the contrast settings: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ENHANCING THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (SHARPNESS) This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 OK Sharpness Off 1 2 3 4 5 On Less Sharp More Sharp Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness. After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in To cancel the sharpness setting: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (DROP OUT COLOUR) This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Drop Out colour] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE (RGB Adjust) This function heightens or lightens any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), and B (blue). R (Red) + G (Green) + B (Blue) + 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB Adjust] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 OK RGB Adjust This setting is only applied to colour jobs. Off -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 R On G B Tap of the colour you want to adjust or slide the slider to adjust the colouring. After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in Touch [+] to darken and [-] to lighten selected colour tone. To cancel the RGB Adjust setting: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE (ERASE) When scanning thick originals or books, erase any peripheral shadows that may be produced on the image. Scanning a thick book When a bound document is scanned, shadows appear in the peripheral areas and around the binding portion of the scanned image. Not using the erase function Shadows appear in the image. Using the erase function No shadows appear.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS To change the default erase width setting: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment]. The width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2"). The setting changed here will apply to [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment] in "Settings". 1 Place the original.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Erase Clear OK Up Outer Frame Specify Frame+Centre Right Left Down Reverse erase position of back face Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. Check that the tapped checkbox is set to . If the [Specify Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left],and [Right] checkboxes are set to . If the [Specify Frame+Centre] key is tapped, all the checkboxes are set to .
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A THIN ORIGINAL (SLOW SCAN MODE) Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D • When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 4 Specify the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A HEAVY ORIGINAL (HEAVY PAPER SCAN) Use this function when you wish to scan heavy originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent heavy originals from misfeeding. A A B C D Heavy paper scan is not possible when "Settings (administrator)" - [ enabled.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Heavy Paper Scan] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A TRANSMISSION (BLANK PAGE SKIP) If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to send only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless blank sheets without checking an original. • If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided sending.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key. Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. OK Blank Page Skip After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Off Skip Blank Page and [Back] keys in Skip Blank and Back Shadow To cancel the Blank Page Skip setting: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION (ORIGINAL COUNT) Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission. Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes. • The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Check the number of original sheets. 0 pages of original (Pg.No.1) have been scanned. Send the scanned data? Cancel 7 Send The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP) This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. An "O" mark is stamped in fluorescent pink on scanned originals. Verification stamp 1 1 • To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed. • When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or [Others] key, and tap the [Verif. Stamp] key. The appropriate icon or checkbox is selected. If you tap the [Others] key, tap the [Back] key after the settings have been completed. To cancel the verification stamp setting: Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or the [Others] key, and tap [Verif. Stamp] to clear the checkmark. 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST SKEWED SCAN DATA (Original Skew Adjustment) When the original is skewed, or when images within the original are skewed, this automatically corrects the skewing, and saves the document. • The post-adjustment image is not shown in preview images, and is displayed as it was scanned. • If adjustment is not required and text and images are on an angle for design reasons, adjustment may still occur automatically.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 OK Others Mixed Size Original Original Count Erase Dual Page Scan Book Divide Card Shot Multicrop Business Card Scan Image Crop Timer Verif. Stamp Background Adjustment Original Skew Adjustment Blank Page Skip Drop Out colour Sharpness Contrast RGB Adjust File Quick File Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Original Skew Adjustment] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. When you have completed the setting, tap the [Back] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND) Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender address, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of the file you transmit. This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode. Example of the sender information printed (1) (2) (3) (4) Date, time: The date and time of transmission. Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine. Source Address.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of destination, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the key of the print settings. OK Transaction Report After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Do not Print and [Back] keys in Print at Error Always Print Print Original Image To cancel the transaction report settings: Tap the [Do not Print] key. • The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows: •"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION) Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 Place the original. When in fax mode, then after completing this procedure, proceed to Step 3. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. CHANGING MODES (page 2-10) Specify the destination.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 Specify the time (hour and minute) in 24-hour format. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. • Tap the areas displaying the hour and minute respectively, and enter the values using the numeric keys. • It is convenient to use to finely adjust the time. • The setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CA] key to cancel the operation.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING A SIGNATURE WHEN SENDING AN IMAGE (ELECTRONIC SIGNATURE) You can add a signature when sending a scanned image. This allows the recipient to check your sender information in the electronic signature. This function is available for Scan to E-mail. To add an electronic signature to a scanned image • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ENCRYPTING THE TRANSMITTED DATA (ENCRYPTION) You can encrypt the transmitted data to strengthen security. This function is available for Scan to E-mail. To encrypt transmitted data • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY LOG PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS Print a log of recent image sending activities (date, name of destination, time required, result, and other items). The Image Sending Activity Report contains information that is useful in dealing with problems, such as the types of errors that occurred. The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed. Examples of messages that are printed in the result column Print Page Description OK The transaction was completed normally.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES AUTOMATICALLY The Internet fax function periodically connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed. In the default setting, this function checks for reception once every five minutes.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS PRINTING RECEIVED DATA PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a PIN Code must be entered. When this function is used, a PIN Code entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME Print received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. • The printed data is automatically deleted from memory. • If the power is turned off at the specified time, printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING Check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)" * The factory default setting is disabled.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 3 Select Image to Operate. Return to Received Data List Print Forward to Other Address Delete File Erase Specified Range Select All Page Tap the image you wish to print, and tap [Print] on the action panel. The machine starts printing the image. • [Select All Page]: Selects all displayed images. • [Release All Page]: Cancels all images that have been selected by "Select All Page". • / : Use these keys to enlarge or reduce an image.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAX DATA (FAX DATA FORWARD) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received Internet faxes are forwarded to another previously registered Internet fax address (including direct SMTP). • Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) Received Internet faxes are automatically forwarded to a fax destination number, an Internet fax address, an e-mail address, a file server address, a desktop address, or a network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed. In setting mode (Web version), configure the inbound routing settings.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 3 Click [Sender Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] menu in the "Settings (Web version)". 4 Enter the sender address or fax number in "Internet Fax Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate, and click the [Add to List] button. The sender address or number you entered will be added to the "Address to be Entered" list.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 10 Select the file format. The format can be set separately for each forwarding address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in the table). • Images forwarded in TIFF format may not be displayed correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file format to PDF. • If the Internet fax address is selected as a recipient, data is forwarded in TIFF regardless of the specified format.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S LOCAL DRIVE (INBOUND ROUTING) Received faxes can be saved to the machine's local drive. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the saved Internet faxes. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail. Received faxes are saved in the following directory: \\MFP\faxreceive • Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS How to save received faxes to the local drive 1 In "Settings (administrator)", click [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Public Folder / NAS Setting]. (Administrator rights required.) 2 Select [Allowed] in "faxreceive:Use of Storage" and click the [Submit] button.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. When data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS SAVING RECEIVED DATA Save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled *in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. When data is received, 1 is shown at the top of the screen. Notification Machine Information Check Received Data.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS IMAGE SEND JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a scanner mode job, select the [Scan] tab. To check the status of an Internet fax job, select the [Internet Fax] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the following items:.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS A usual transmission job moves to the job list when transmission is completed. Then the status field displays "Send OK". However, Internet Fax jobs such as reception, timer transmission, retries, and forwarding are displayed in the job status screen as follows: Reception job During Internet Fax receiving, the status field displays "Receiving" in the job queue list.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE You can install the scanner driver on your computer and use a TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer. Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of multiple originals.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) 10:15 2 Tap the [PC Scan] mode icon to switch to PC Scan mode. If the [PC Scan] mode icon does not appear, tap move the screen. PC Scan to When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no other keys can be used. [At your computer] 1 Start the TWAIN-compliant application on your computer and select [SHARP MFP TWAIN K] in the application's scanner selection. Preview the image.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) • For further information on the scan settings, click the scanner driver Help. button in the preview image screen of step 7 to open • If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only one original page will be scanned for the preview image. If you wish to include that original in the scan, return it to the document feeder tray. Select scanning settings while viewing the image.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) [At the machine] Tap the [Exit] key. 5 This machine is in the PC scan mode. Do not remove the original. Scanner IP address:0.0.0.0 a Exit 6 Tap the [Finish] key. PC scan in progress.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY) When the application integration module kit is installed, metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) is generated based on pre-stored information and transmitted separately from an image file that is generated for sending a scanned image. The metadata file is created in XML format.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION) To configure the settings related to metadata, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Metadata Settings]→ [Metadata Entry] in "Settings (administrator)". (Administrator rights are required.) Enable metadata delivery. Storing Metadata Sets Store the items (the metadata set) to write to the XML file that will be generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata items can be configured in a metadata set.
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY TRANSMITTING METADATA TRANSMITTING METADATA Select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata delivery. Metadata delivery is performed using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, perform metadata delivery using document filing in [Metadata Entry] in "Settings (Web version).
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA FIELDS The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted. • Data automatically generated by the machine These data are always included in the XML file and are automatically stored on your PC. • Previously defined fields These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and assigned to appropriate XML tags.
DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEFORE USING SCAN TO LOCAL DRIVE IN DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE . . . . . .
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING This function saves the original scanned on the machine, transmitted fax image, or print data from a computer on the local drive of the machine or an external memory device as data. The stored files can be printed or transmitted as required. Editing of the stored files, for example combining, is also possible. A PDF file created for PC browsing can be displayed or printed on a computer.
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING USES OF DOCUMENT FILING Using the document filing function allows you to additionally print out conference material with the same settings, or print out ledger sheets used for routine tasks as required. Additionally printing out conference material with the same settings Scanning is not necessary. No settings are necessary.
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Quick File Folder Documents scanned using [Quick File] on the action panel are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically assigned to each job. Main Folder Scanned documents are stored in this folder. When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name. A password (4 to 32 characters) can also be set when storing a file ("Confidential" save) as required.
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom folders and in the Main folder Examples of original types Full colour original (Text and photo example) Size: A4 Number of pages* Number of files Max. 5700 Max. 3000 Black & white original (Text) Size: A4 Max.
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Information added to files When saving a file using "File", add the following information to distinguish it from other files. User Name: Name1 File Name: Meeting handout Password: 12345678 "Meeting minutes" folder User Name The user name is required to enter a file ownership and other information. The user name must be registered in advance. File Name Names a file. Stored to Specifies a folder to store files.
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE To use Document Filing, select the action panel for each mode. To save data simultaneously with a copy or fax, tap [File] or [Quick File] on the action panel in each mode. To use Document Filing from the beginning, select the action panel in the Document Filing mode. Tap any one of the keys to scan and save the original.
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE (4) (5) (1) Folder Select Main Folder Scan to Local Drive Scan to External Memory Device Quick File Folder (6) Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print Select File from Network Folder to Print (2) (7) CA (8) (3) (9) (1) Use to save originals to be shared among users. (2) The folder for the registered user. (3) Displayed during user authentication.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING FILING WHILE USING ANOTHER MODE QUICK FILE This function allows you to store an original in copy mode or image send mode as an image file in the Quick File folder of the machine. The image file stored in quick file mode can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to copy the document or transmit it in image send mode without having to locate the original.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Start a copy or image sending. 3 When the function is executed, the image data of the original is stored in the Quick File folder. To prevent accidental saving of the file, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [Start] key is tapped.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING 2 Change to normal mode and tap [File] on the action panel to specify the file information. To select the user name, file name, folder, and property setting, see “File Information (page 7-12)".
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING File Information The procedure for detail settings is described below. Specifying a property, user name, file name, and folder makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when [Confidential] is selected for Property and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission. Changing the property A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING 2 Tap the key of the user name. 3 Tap Alternatively, you can select a user name by tapping the [Call with Registration Number] key and entering the user number. The user number must be first set by selecting [User Control] in "Settings (administrator)" → [User Settings] → [User List]. . The system goes back to the screen of step 1 to display the selected user name. Assigning a file name A file name can be assigned to the file.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing You can set the initial file format of public PDF or the file for download which is created during execution of each job. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing].
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVING DOCUMENT DATA ONLY (SCAN TO LOCAL DRIVE) SAVE ON LOCAL DRIVE Storing from Easy Scan Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen. 1 2 Tap the [Local Drive/USB] key. 3 Place the original. 4 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) Tap the [Scan to Local Drive] key.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Storing from Document Filing 1 Tap the [File Retrieve] key on the Home screen. 2 Tap the [Scan to Local Drive] on the action panel. 3 Place the original. 4 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVE IN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE Storing from Easy Scan Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen. 1 2 3 4 Tap the [Local Drive/USB] key. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) OK Local Drive/USB Scan to Local Drive Tap the [Scan to USB] key.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Storing from Document Filing 1 Tap the [File Retrieve] key on the Home screen. 2 Tap [Scan to External Memory Device] on the action panel. 3 Place the original. 4 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-39) File Name Check the file name and save location, and tap keys for any settings you want to select.
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Scan to USB memory device Connect the USB memory device to the machine. 1 • Use FAT32, NTFS or exFAT format for USB memory device. • When the format of the USB memory device is FAT32, use a 32 GB or less USB memory device. 2 External memory device (USB) is connected. 10:15 OK Print from external memory device (USB) Scan to External Memory Device Easy Copy When a screen for selecting the action appears, tap [Scan to External Memory Device].
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES USING STORED FILES SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE The screens and procedures differ depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled. The sequence for using a stored file depending on the situation is explained. For information on user authentication procedures, see “USER AUTHENTICATION (page 9-12)". For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see “USER CONTROL (page 9-20)".
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE SELECTION SCREEN The file selection screen can be displayed in "List" format or "Thumbnail" format to display thumbnail images of files.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES THUMBNAIL DISPLAY MODE (1) Main Folder Execute Batch Print All Files Change Setting to Print Move (2) Copy_20210520_091323 AAAAAAAA AAAAAAAA Check Image AAAAAAAA See Detail Information Delete Select All (1) Switch the file display mode between list and thumbnail. (2) Displays thumbnails of the saved files.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE 1 Tap the [File retrieve] key. When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is configured by selecting [User Control] in "Settings (administrator)" → [User List], the custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. 2 Folder Select Main Folder Tap the key of the folder that contains the desired file.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE PRINTING A file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings. • Print settings that are changed by re-manipulation of the file cannot be saved.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES MULTI-FILE PRINTING MULTI-FILE PRINTING 1 Select the keys of the multiple files that you wish to print. • Confidential files cannot be printed simultaneously with other files. • A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder. If the job type is changed with the By Job Display key or the screen is changed by selected, the selection of the file will be cancelled.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES BATCH PRINTING Batch Print Settings In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Batch Print Settings]. Set whether or not the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key are prohibited in the user name selection screen when printing all files, whether files are sorted by date in newest or oldest order, and whether file names are sorted in ascending or descending order.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES 8 Tap the [Start] key to start printing. If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will return to the file list screen. It [Delete the Data] on the action panel is tapped, all files that match the current search conditions will be deleted. FILE TRANSMISSION The settings used when the file was stored with document filing are stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE MOVING Changes the file storage location. (The file is moved to another folder.) A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential". After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below. SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE (page 7-23) 1 Main Folder Tap [Move] on the action panel.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES DELETE FILE Stored files that are no longer required can be deleted. A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential". After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below. ► SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE (page 7-23) 1 Main Folder Tap the [Delete] key.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Automatic Deletion of File You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted by specifying the folders and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the disclosure of sensitive information and frees space on the local drive. Automatic Deletion of File Settings Document filing settings are described below. Tap the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE IMAGE CHECKING FILE IMAGE Copy_20210520_093143 User Unknown A4 Full Colour (1) Return to File Selection Screen A4 (2) (4) 1 1 (3) (5) (6) (1) Displays file information. (4) Displays the page number. (2) Displays file preview images. (5) Displays the total page count. (3) Enlarge or reduce the preview screen. (6) Rotate the preview screen in increments of 90 degrees.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE MERGING You can combine files that have been saved by Document Filing. • If you have only selected a single file, the [Combine File] key is not displayed. • The file name is a combination of "the first file name", "a tilde (~)", and "Serial No.". As required, change the file name at a later time. • The files are joined in the selected order. After selecting two desired files, follow the steps below.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREEN Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen. This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another destination. 1 2 Tap the job status display.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVAL When there are many stored files, it may take some time to locate a file. The search function of document filing mode can be used to find a file quickly. Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. As required, a folder can also be specified as a search range.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES 3 Main Folder Select search conditions. Execute Batch Print All Files Select File from FTP to Print Search User Name Select File from USB Memory to Print Login Name Select File from Network Folder to Print File or Folder Name PIN Code/Password Date CA Search Start Search Just Within the Folder Print Now Select All 4 Copies Delete Tap each text box and set the search condition.
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE A file stored in the FTP server, USB memory device, or network folder of a PC can be printed. The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings. On the action panel, tap [Select File from FTP to Print], [Select File from USB Memory to Print] or [Select File from Network Folder to Print]. For more information, see “PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER (page 4-88)".
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Item Description Select from User List Click the [Setup] button and search for users from the list. Login Name Set the number of files that are displayed. Search Folder Set the folder. File Name Enter a file name. (Up to 30 characters) PIN Code/Password of File Enter the password that is set for the file (4 to 32 digits). Stored Date Set the date and time the file was saved. Search Result Use these settings to enter search conditions.
MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 BASE SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODE . . . . . . . 8-3 PAPERS CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAPER LOADING ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STAPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUNCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANUAL FINISHING►MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING MANUAL FINISHING In manual finishing mode, you can set for finish on copied or printed pages. You can select the manual finishing mode if the inserter is installed. When the finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher (large stacker), punch module, or folding unit is installed, finishing operations, such as stapling, punching or folding can be performed.
MANUAL FINISHING►MANUAL FINISHING SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODE Change the manual finishing mode to simple mode or normal mode as explained in "HOME SCREEN (page 2-7)". BASE SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODE Selects a paper tray for finishing. Tap the [Type and Size] key to set the paper type and paper size. Shows the selected paper and output trays. Selects an output tray for finished paper. Sets the number of copies for output and the number of sheets per set. Staples each set of output.
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS PAPERS CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER You can check the type and size of paper loaded in the inserter on the display to the right of [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray] key. The paper size is automatically detected when paper is loaded. To set the paper type and size, tap the [Type and Size] key. Paper types and sizes can be specified for each of the upper and lower trays.
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS PAPER LOADING ORIENTATION When using the staple, punch or the paper folding function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS • To use the staple function, you need to mount a finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). • To use the saddle stitch function, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). PUNCH Touch panel key Orientation Result A A 2 Hole Punch A A A punch module is required for paper punch.
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS Touch panel key Orientation C-Fold Accordion Fold Double Fold Result ABC CA ABC AC A B CD DA Z-Fold A B CD AB D • A folding unit is required to be installed in order to use paper folding functions other than saddle folds. • To use the saddle fold function, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING USING MANUAL FINISHING Change from the Home Screen or each mode to manual finishing mode, and carry out the following procedure. SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODE (page 8-3) Set the guides to the size of the paper. 1 Grasp the guide lock lever to adjust the guide. When you have finished the adjustment, release the lock lever. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" × 11"R, extend the bypass tray all the way out.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING 4 Change the paper tray or output tray as required. 8½x11 8½x11 5 TO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAY (page 8-17) TO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAY (page 8-17) Tap the [Start] key to begin manual finishing. To stop manual finishing: Tap the [Stop] key.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING STAPLE FUNCTION When a finisher (large stacker) is installed, you can staple loaded papers into a sheaf. (Staple function) When a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed, you can staple papers in two places on the centerline and fold them before being output. (Saddle stitch function) Staple Saddle Stitch 5 1 6 1 • You can use the saddle stitch function for size A4R to A3W (8-1/2" × 11"R to 12" × 18") papers.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING COPIES/PAGES FUNCTION If you wish to staple multiple sets at once, use the Copies/Pages. Load sorted paper and tap the [Copies/Pages] key to enter the number of copies and the number of pages per set. ABC ABC AB A A B C A B C A B C The settings on the Copies/Pages will not be effective for the paper folding and punch functions. Setting the number of copies (number of pages) 1 Tap the [Copies/Pages] key.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING If you select [All Pages] for the number of copies/number of pages, specify "1" for the number of sets to be printed. If you set more copies or pages than the number of copies or pages that can be stapled, a message is displayed and the [Start] key is disabled. See "Specifications" in the "Start Guide" and specify the number of copies or pages that can be stapled.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING PUNCH FUNCTION If a punch module is installed, holes can be punched in paper. A A • Paper sizes that are available for the punch function are B5R to A3 (8-1/2" × 11"R to 11" × 17"). • You cannot use A3W (12" × 18") size papers, and special media such as transparency film. • The punch function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or paper folding functions. However, it can be used with them if the paper size used is A3, B4 or 11" × 17" for Z-fold.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING PAPER FOLDING FUNCTION When a paper folding unit is installed, you can fold papers in Z-fold and C-fold. When a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed, you can use saddle folds. The paper sizes that can be selected vary depending on the type of paper fold.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING Types of Folds Folding results Paper Size Z-Fold A3, B4, A4R, 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11"R AB D ABCD • Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used. • The paper folding function cannot be used with the staple and hole punch function. However, it can be used with them if the paper size for Z-fold is A3, B4 or 11" × 17". Selecting the paper folding function Tap your desired fold key in the "Fold".
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING MULTIPLE FOLD (WHEN SADDLE FOLD IS SELECTED) If Saddle Fold is selected, multiple sheets can be folded together. Five sheets of paper are folded at a time. AB B A A B B • When four or less papers are set, four or less papers are folded at a time. • If five or more papers are set and if four or less papers remain, the remaining number of papers are folded at a time. • Some types of paper reduces the number of sheets that are folded every set.
MANUAL FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING TO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAY The paper tray is automatically detected when paper is loaded in the inserter. If you need to specify a paper tray when, for example, paper has been loaded into both the upper and lower trays on the inserter, tap the [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray] key to specify the appropriate paper tray. TO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAY The output tray is automatically selected based on the output function you set.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 ECO FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 PREHEAT MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 ECO RECOMMENDATION FUNCTION DISPLAY . . . . .
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY ECO ECO FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE Mode Settings The eco function settings are set in a batch. "Custom Mode" and "Eco Mode" are available. Setting values applied by each mode is as follows. Function Custom Mode Eco Mode Preheat Mode Setting 15min. (for Europe), 1min. (Except for Europe) 1min. Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat mode On On Auto Power Shut-Off Timer Fix transition time.: 45min.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY A message appears 15 seconds before Auto Power Shut-Off Mode is entered. To close the message and continue normal operation, tap the [Continue] button. The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal operation time. If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears, the machine enters auto power shut-off mode.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE Printing or outputting received fax data in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer turns on the power, and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut-Off Mode immediately after completing the print job.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY Transition to Energy Saving and Auto Power Shut-Off modes Pattern Transition time Average outputs per hour* Mode1 (Job Start Priority1) After 1 hour 1000 or more Mode2 (Job Start Priority2) After 30 minutes 250 to 999 Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1) After 5 minutes 60 to 249 Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2) After the minimum time period Up to 59 * Factory default setting Automatic This function controls the power optimally for each t
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY ECO SCAN Non-print jobs such as sending a scanned original are performed with the fusing unit turned off. Fusing unit is turned on Sleep mode Fusing unit is turned off Copy Print H L 1 Fusing unit is turned off L Image Send Document Filing L ECO SCAN SETTING Set “Eco Scan Setting" to , and select a mode or screen in which to enable Eco Scan Setting. The following modes and screens can be set.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY ENERGY SAVING PATTERN LIST This function analyzes machine usage and controls entry into auto power shut-off mode based on frequency of use. If you want to manage machine power by using an energy saving pattern list, select [Manual] in "Settings (administrator)" - [Eco Setting] - [Energy Save] - [Change transition time by time of day.], and select an Automatic Update Pattern from the pull-down list or one of Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTING The machine operator panel can be turned On or Off at a preset time. Up to three (3) patterns can be set. The "Setting 1", "Setting 2" and "Setting 3" are executed in this sequence if set at the same day of week or at the same clock time.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY SPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGS You can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the "specific date" and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date. "Specific Date" tab A period of up to 7 days can be set for Specific Date. Set the specific date, energy saving pattern to be applied, and the operation that takes place if the specific date falls on a non-work day.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY DISPLAYING ECO RECOMMENDATION SETTINGS (ECO RECOMMENDATION FUNCTION DISPLAY) When the base screen of normal mode is displayed, eco recommendation settings appear. This function does not operate in easy mode. To use the eco recommendation function display: "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Eco Recommendation Function Display]. The displayed functions are as follows.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY MOTION SENSOR This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode. (Motion Sensor Mode Only) Three settings are available for the detection range ( / / ). In addition, when the motion sensor responds during the time when the power of this machine is set to OFF in the Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting, you can be warned with a notification message.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE USER AUTHENTICATION User authentication restricts the use of the machine to users that have been registered. The functions that each user is allowed to use can be specified, allowing the machine to be customized to meet the needs of your workplace. When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, each user must log in to use the machine.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 2 (1) Enter your user number. Tap the [OK] key. ***** User Authentication 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 C (2) CA If the entered user number is authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD This method enables users to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the machine or the administrator of the LDAP server. When starting the machine, the login screen appears. When controlled by login name and password • Different items may appear in the screen when LDAP authentication is used.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 2 Enter the password. User Authentication Enter the from the soft keyboard. If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that is stored with your LDAP server login name. Each entered character will be displayed as “ ". After entering, tap the [OK] key. When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different passwords stored in "User List" and in the LDAP server, use the password stored in the LDAP server.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE • To limit the number of pages that a user can use: In "Settings (administrator)", select [User Control] → [Access Control Settings] → [Pages Limit Group]. • To hide the number of pages that can be used after login: In "Settings (administrator)", disable [System Settings] → [Authentication Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Display Usage Status after Login].
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE QUICK AUTHENTICATION When operating the machine, this enables easy authentication by tapping a preconfigured icon. • Up to 20 users can be registered. • Only the machine supports quick authentication. Web page authentication and authentication from a printer driver cannot be used. To use web page authentication and authentication from a printer driver, enter to authenticate.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 3 Home System Info. User Name Registration Register Login Name AAA AAA E-mail Address aaa@aaa_aaa.com Password *********************************************... Password (confirmation) *********************************************... Job Status Change icon(s) Enter user information, and tap the [Register] key. Specify the user icon, Login Name, E-mail Address, Password, and Password (confirmation).
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE When you have finished using the machine and are ready to log out, tap [Logout].
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE USER CONTROL You can perform user management such as registering login users and specifying the user authentication method. In [User Control] of "Settings (administrator)" and [System Settings] of [Authentication Settings]. User Control allows you to register and manage the users who use the machine. By limiting the number of pages and functions that a user or a group of users can use, incorrect use of the machine can be prevented.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE ORGANIZATION /GROUP LIST A user can be registered in an organization/group to enable sharing the contacts and group information registered in that group. When counting all used pages, you can check how many pages and what functions are used by each group. Multiple organizations/groups can be set for a user.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE PAGE LIMIT GROUP LIST A Page Limit Group List can be used to limit the number of sheets that users in a specific group can use for copies or print jobs, and limit the number of pages that can be scanned or faxed. The users can also be prohibited from using certain functions.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE AUTHORITY GROUP Authority Group is used to restrict the functions and settings that users who belong to a specific group can use. By setting restrictions on functions and settings, you can prevent inexperienced users from performing incorrect operations and settings, and thereby enable safe use of the machine.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE FAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LIST For each group, you can register an environment with settings that are convenient for the group. For example, if the users speak different languages, a language can be set for each group, and this setting is applied automatically at login (normally the display language cannot be changed each time the machine is used).
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE BILLING CODE BILLING CODE A billing code, which is added to a recorded job log when a printing or sending job has been executed, is used to perform billing processing. Billing codes are classified into two types: main code and sub code. A billing code is recorded in the job log when it is entered and a print or send job is executed.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE USE BILLING CODE If the use of billing code is enabled in "Settings (administrator)", the billing code entry window is displayed at the time of mode transition (at the time of printing/sending in document filing mode). Enter the main code or sub code as required. • To enable use of the billing code Select "Settings (administrator)" → [User Control] → [Billing Code Setting] → [Administration Settings], then set [Use Billing Code] to [Enable].
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 2 OK Select Billing Code Cancel and Return Add/Edit Billing Code Main Code Main Code Name MAIN001 Company 1 MAIN002 Company 2 MAIN003 Company 3 MAIN004 Company 4 MAIN005 Company 5 MAIN006 Company 6 MAIN007 Company 7 MAIN008 Company 8 Tap and select the main code from the list. CA To search for the main code or main code name Tap .
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE Directly entering a billing code 1 When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the box in [Main Code], then enter the main code. Billing Code Please enter Billing Code. Main Code AAAA Select from List Sub Code AAAA Select from List Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. CA Bypass Billing Code OK When not specifying a billing code Tap the [Bypass Billing Code] key. The use code is set to the main code.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE Register a new billing code. A billing code can be registered not only from the billing code entry window but also from "Settings". A total of up to 2000 main and sub codes can be registered. Shared range of billing code The registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group at the time of user authentication.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 4 (4) Tap the box of [Main Code], then type in the main code. Cancel and Return Main Code Registration Main Code End Registration Main Code Name Register Next Billing Code. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. (5) CA 5 6 Tap the box of [Main Code Name], then type in the main code name. Specify the code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 8 To continuously register other billing codes, tap [Register Next Billing Code.]. Execute steps 4 to 7 to register the main code. To cancel the registration Tap [Cancel and Return] on the action panel. This cancels all the registered billing codes and returns the screen to the previous window. 9 Tap [End Registration] on the action panel. This finalizes the registration and returns the screen to the previous window.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE You can change or delete the registered billing code. The billing code can also be edited or deleted from "Settings". Editing a billing code 1 When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code. Billing Code Please enter Billing Code.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 5 Tap [End Registration] on the action panel. This finalizes the registration and returns the screen to the previous window. Tap to finish the registration procedure. To return to the billing code entry window Tap the [CA] key. Deleting a billing code 1 When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code. Billing Code Please enter Billing Code.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►MANAGING THE USE OF THE MACHINE 4 When the confirmation message appears, tap the [Delete] key.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT USING WI-FI WI-FI This machine can connect to mobile devices and others via Wi-Fi. This machine can use three communication modes. Wi-Fi environment can be configured from System Settings. COMMUNICATION MODES OF WI-FI Infrastructure Mode The machine and mobile device can communicate via network with an access point installed.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT Wi-Fi Direct Mode The machine and mobile device directly communicate via Wi-Fi. In this mode, communication with the network to which the machine is connected is unavailable. The machine and the mobile device are connected in Wi-Fi Direct mode. Network Data flow Data will not be sent to Network beyond the machine. This function can be used on an AndroidTM device.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT EASILY CONNECT WITH AN NFC-COMPATIBLE MOBILE DEVICE (EASY CONNECT) You can easily connect the machine to a smartphone or other NFC compatible mobile device. • Touch the NFC touch pointarea in the lower right corner of the operation panel. By installing the dedicated application in the mobile device in advance, the application will start automatically after the device connects to the machine, allowing you to print immediately.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT CONNECTING BY QR CODE You can connect by displaying the QR code on the machine's touch panel and then having your mobile device (with the dedicated application already installed) read the QR code. The machine sends the information required for connection to the mobile device, and the information is saved. No settings are required on the mobile device, and setup is quickly accomplished.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT NAS NAS (Network Attached Storage) is a storage device that is connected to the network. You can use part of the machine’s local drive area as a simple file server to save files and browse saved files. FOLDER STRUCTURE The folder structure is as follows. root public shared faxreceive • root •public: •shared: •faxreceive: Area for storing PDF files for PC browsing that have been created using the document filing function.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE Remotely operate the machine on your computer or mobile device such as smartphone. You can operate the machine from the same panel as the machine's operation panel that is displayed on your PC, with the same feel as operating in front of the machine. The machine Your computer User's Manual User's Manual Operation panel Operate the machine using your computer screen.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT Example: RealVNC® Start the VNC viewer, enter the IP address of the machine in the "VNC Server" entry box, and click the [Connect] button. 1 Check with the administrator of the machine for its IP address. 2 Follow the message on the operation panel of the machine to permit the connection. When the machine is connected to a VNC application software, panel.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT Sharp OSA Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that directly links the machine to software applications for work (external applications) over a network. When you use a machine that supports Sharp OSA, you can link controls on the operation panel and device functions such as scan send to external applications.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT EXTERNAL ACCOUNT APPLICATION The external account module enables you to use an "external account application" for centralized account management of an MFP on a network. An "external account application" can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When "external authentication mode" is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT VIRUS SCAN When this machine is connected to a network environment, it may be exposed to viruses and other attacks from outside. It is also possible to be infected with a virus via a USB memory device. There is a concern that a virus infecting the device may spread to other devices. By installing a virus detection kit, viruses can be detected and dealt with at an early stage to prevent the spread of virus infection.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT Update timing for virus definition files You can update the virus definition file at the following time. Regular update Automatically updates and keeps virus definition files in the latest state. On-demand update You can update the virus definition file immediately. When is displayed in the virus scan of the machine information on the System Information screen, tap and then tap [Update Now] to update the virus definition file.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT WHEN A VIRUS IS DETECTED Displayed in the System Information screen When a virus is detected by the virus scan, the following screen will be displayed on the System Information screen. An icon will also appear in the System Area to indicate that a virus has been detected. If a virus is detected, stop using the machine and take anti-virus countermeasure.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT If the target data is an embedded application Scan during installation and update Installation and update via Application Portal/USB memory Cancel the installation/update, and the touch panel will display that a virus has been detected. When updating, the user confirms the contents, the screen display is turned off, and then the application operates as before the update.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►USING THIS MACHINE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT UPDATING THE VIRUS DEFINITION FILE Updates the virus definition file at the following timings. • When the machine starts up Updates the virus definition file when the machine starts up. If virus scan is performed at startup, the virus definition file is updated before scanning. • Regular update Update virus definition files automatically to keep the files in the latest state. It updates automatically, so no settings are required.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE The structure of the machine and the software are designed to allow all people to use the machine with ease. UNIVERSAL DESIGN RELATED TO OPERATION Adjustment of operation panel angle The angle of the entire operation panel can be adjusted to enable use even when seated. Grip handle on paper trays The grip-type handles allow easy use from above or below.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE Confirmation of placement of original in document feeder The original setting lamp lights up when the original is correctly set on the original setting table. Even for users who have difficulty confirming that the original is set on the original setting table, the original setting lamp can be turned on to confirm that the original is set correctly.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN FEATURES The machine has design features and settings that are compatible with universal design. Easy-to-use user interface • Easy mode This mode shows only frequently used items. Buttons and text are enlarged to increase ease of operation. Almost all regular operations can be completed using the easy mode screen.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE Intuitive operation • Use the QR code to view the User's Manual page. Tap the [User's Manual] key on the home screen of the touch panel to display a QR code that indicates the page containing the user's manual. You can read the QR code with your mobile device to easily view the corresponding page. • Easy operation by storing programs The program function lets you store groups of settings for copying, fax, and other functions.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►JOB LOG LIST JOB LOG LIST ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG The machine records the performed jobs in the job log. The main information recorded in the job log is described below. • To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed, regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►JOB LOG LIST No. 1 Item name Job ID The job ID is recorded. Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum of 999999, after which the count resets to 1. 2 Account Job ID The job ID used in the Sharp OSA is recorded. 3 Job Mode The job mode type, such as copy or print is recorded. 4 Computer Name The name of the computer that sent a print job is recorded.* 5 User Name The user name when the user authentication function is used is recorded.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►JOB LOG LIST No. 20 Item name Number of Reserved Pages Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other job is recorded. 21 Number of Completed Pages Number of completed pages of a set is recorded. 22 Result The result of a job is recorded. 23 Error Cause When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error is recorded. Output The output mode of a printed job is recorded. 25 Staple The status of stapling is recorded.
CONVENIENT USE OF THE MACHINE►JOB LOG LIST No. 47 Item name Description Document Filing Related Item Document Filing Status of document filing is recorded. Storing Mode Document filing storing mode is recorded. Common Functionality Colour Setting Colour mode selected by user is recorded. 50 Special Modes Special modes selected when the job was executed is recorded. 51 File Name The stored file name is recorded.* 52 Data Size [KB] The size of a file is recorded.
SETTING MODE SETTING MODE SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAYING THE SETTING MODE ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAYING THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION). SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVERVIEW OF SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING METHOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING MODE Internet Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 Send Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101 Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103 Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105 Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-107 Fax Settings . . . . .
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE SETTING MODE SETTING MODE "Settings" allows management of various functions that will make it easier to use the machine, such as default registration for each function, network connection setting, and log check of operation status. Setting mode can also be selected using the Web browser by accessing the machine from a PC connected to the same network as the machine.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE DISPLAYING THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION) When the machine is connected to the network, access the built-in Web server of the machine using the PC’s Web browser. From the setting mode of the machine, print the IP address of the machine and enter the address on the PC’s Web browser. Tap the [System Info.] key.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE 4 Select a login name and enter your password. Entering a password • If you click an item that requires administrator rights, the password entry screen will appear regardless of the settings. • Select a user that has administrator rights and enter the user password. • If user authentication is not enabled, you can set the login name to "Administrator" and enter the administrator password to log in to the Web page.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE SETTING MODE This section describes typical items in the operation method in the setting mode. OVERVIEW OF SETTING MODE (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) BP-xxxxx (1) (10) (2) xxxxxxxx (11) BP-xxxxx (3) (1) xxx xxx (6) Menu tab This tab shows the first level of the setting menu. Click this tab to show the tab's setting items in the setting menu. Some settings such as the system settings do not appear in the setting menu when the tab is clicked.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE SETTING METHOD This section explains the basic procedure for configuring settings using "Home Screen Settings" as an example. This setting is used to change the background image of a home screen to an image provided by the user. 1 Connect to the web page as explained in "DISPLAYING THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION) (page 10-4)". 2 Display the "Home Screen Settings" setting screen. (1) Click the [System Settings] tab ( ).
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE 4 Select "Use Custom Image" and click the [Browse] button to select the desired image. (1) Check the "Use Custom Image" checkbox (2) Click the [Browse] button. (1) (2) When you click the [Browse] button, the file selection screen appears. Select the file of the desired background image. 5 Click the [Submit] button. Path 6 If you have another item you want to set, configure the setting from the setting menu or menu tab.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST Click the link file to see the details of each description. In the setting mode, there are some that can be set only on the Web page and some that can be set only on this machine. *1 Only web pages can be set. *2 Items that can be set only in the setting mode of this machine. *3 For more information on settings, consult a qualified service technician.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ User Control-User Settings ●User Settings User List Custom Index Organization /Group List User Information Print ■ User Control-Access Control Settings ●Access Control Settings Pages Limit Group Machine Page Limit Setting Authority Group Favourite Operation Group*1 Favourite Operation Group List Favourite Key List Home Screen List ■ User Control-User Count ●User Count ■ User Control-Billing Code Setting ●Billing Code Setting Administration Setting
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Home Screen Settings ●Home Screen Settings Condition Settings Home Screen Registration Icon Background Image ■ System Settings-Copy Settings ●Copy Settings Condition Settings Rotation Copy Setting Disable Copy in Different Size Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios Setting a Maximum Number of Copies Stamp Initial Margin Shift Setting Erase Width Adjustment Initial Multi Shot Setting Card Shot Settings Automatic Saddle Stitch Initial Tab
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Printer Settings ●Printer Settings Condition Settings Prohibit Notice Page Printing Prohibit Test Page Printing A4/Letter Size Auto Change A3/Ledger Size Auto Change Bypass Tray Settings Job Spool Queuing Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print Disabling sending while printing Interface Settings Hexadecimal Dump Mode I/O Timeout Enable Network Port Network Port Emulation Switching Port Switching Met
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Image Send Settings-Common Settings ●Common Settings Condition Settings Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Image Send Settings-Scan Settings ●Scan Settings Initial Status Settings Default Colour Mode Settings Initial File Format Setting Easy Scan Settings Resolution Setting Condition Settings Default Reply.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Image Send Settings-Fax Settings ●Fax Settings Condition Settings Resolution Setting Dial Mode Setting Auto Wake Up Print Pause Time Setting Fax Dest.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Fax Polling Security F-Code Memory Box ■ System Settings-Image Send Settings-Internet Fax Settings ●Internet Fax Settings Condition Settings Initial File Format Setting Auto Wake Up Print Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report Only Activity Report Print Select Setting Send Setting I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting Number of Resend Times at Reception Error Maximum Size of Send Data
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Image Send Settings-Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) ●Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Fax Settings Internet Fax Settings ■ System Settings-Image Send Settings-Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings ●Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings Inbound Routing Settings Sender Address Registration Administration Settings Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings ■ System Settings-Image Send Settings-Metadata Settings ●Metadata Settings ■ S
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Delete Now Executing automatic deletion during Auto Power Shut-Off.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Authentication Settings ●Authentication Settings Default Settings User Authentication Authentication Settings Default Network Authentication Server Setting Specify network server access control Authentication Method Setting Enable Quick Login Device Account Mode Setting Login User Settings for Using Authentication Information Cache Authentication Information for External Service Connect Card Setting Disable Printing by Invalid User Automatic
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Common Settings-Paper Settings ●Paper Settings Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Switching Display Paper Tray Settings when bypass tray detects paper.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Favourite Key Setting Mode Key Display Setting Keyboard Settings Default Keyboard Setting Keyboard Select Set Keyboard Priority Soft Keyboard Template Setting Custom Link Setting*1 ■ System Settings-Common Settings-Device Control ●Device Control Condition Settings Original Size Detector Setting Cancel Detection at Document Glass Original Feeding Mode Actions When Maximum Number of Sheets that can be Stapled is Reached Double Feed Detection Setting Aut
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Clock Adjust Daylight Saving Time Setting Date Format Enable/Disable Settings Authentication Settings Copy Settings Printer Settings Image Send Settings Document Filing Settings Operation Settings Device Control Security Settings Product Key/Application Number Input ■ System Settings-Common Settings-Sound Settings ●Sound Settings Beep Sound Settings (Common) Keys Touch Sound Beep of Invalid Input Reference Tone Copy Complete Sound Scan Complete
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Interface Settings Connection Type IPv4 Settings IPv6 Settings DNS Settings IEEE802.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST ■ System Settings-Security Settings ●Security Settings Password Setting Password Policy Settings Password Change Condition Settings Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job Automatic Deletion of Suspended Print Jobs Time until Suspended Print Jobs are Automatically Deleted Reject Requests from External Sites If Firmware Corruption is Detected, Restore It Apply Security Policy Mandatory Access Control Job Status Jobs Completed List Display Se
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Certificate Management Device Certificate Management Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Management CA Certificate Management ■ System Settings-Energy Save ●Energy Save Eco Setting Eco Recommendation Function Display a Message to Delay the Time of Entry into Preheat Mode / Auto Power Shut-Off Mode Mode Setting Preheat Mode Setting As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode. Fix transition time. Change transition time by time of day.
SETTING MODE►SETTING MODE LIST Reset Settings Restore Factory Defaults Reset the NIC of a Local Drive*2 E-mail Alert and Status Optimization Status Message Alerts Message SMTP Settings ■ System Settings-Image Quality Adjustment ●Image Quality Adjustment Collective Adjustment*2 Fusing Cleaning Mode MC Cleaning Mode Black Letter/Black Line Width Adjustment Dark Streak Reduction Display warning message for black streaks detection.
SETTING MODE►STATUS STATUS Status Machine Identification The Machine Identification displays the system information of the machine. It displays the model name, current status, and machine location. This setting can also be set by general users, except for some items. Item Description Unit Serial Number Indicates the serial number of the machine. Name When you tap the [Not Set] key, the [Machine Identification] screen appears. If [Name] is not set, [Not Set] appears.
SETTING MODE►STATUS Item Description Supply Status Displays the current status of supplies. If staples are installed, their status is displayed. Paper Input Tray Status Displays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine. Display Pattern Setting Switches the display pattern of the home screen. [Reboot the MFP] key Displays the restart screen. (Administrator rights are required.) [Enter the Power Save Mode] key Displays the power save mode screen.
SETTING MODE►STATUS Firmware Version Shows the firmware version of the machine as a list. This function requires administrator rights. Power Reset The Power Reset screen enables you to restart the machine or enter the power save mode. This function requires administrator rights. Item Description Reboot the machine Reboots the machine. Tapping the [Execute] key opens the Restart screen, and then tapping the [Execute] key again restarts the machine.
SETTING MODE►STATUS List for Administrator You can print out the lists and reports that only the administrator can refer to. When using "Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)" in Image Sending Activity Report (Auto), select "Setting mode" → [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Internet Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings] → [2-Sided Printing of Received Data], enabling you to specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing.
SETTING MODE►STATUS Data Receive/Forward List The following lists showing reception settings and forwarding settings can be printed.
SETTING MODE►ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK Address Book Transmission destinations (contacts) such as fax and Scan to E-mail addresses, and groups of transmission destinations, can be stored in the address book. To edit a contact or group, select the name of the contact/group. To add a new contact or group, click the [Add] key. For the procedure for storing contacts and groups using the machine's touch panel, see "ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 6-15)".
SETTING MODE►ADDRESS BOOK Item Description Colour/Greyscale Colour/Greyscale: Select the compression format used for saving colour/greyscale images. If you select a PDF file format as the file format setting, you can select [Reduce Colours]. Factory default settings: Compression Ratio: Middle, Reduce Colours: Disabled Set as Default used Set an address as a default address.
SETTING MODE►ADDRESS BOOK Item Description FTP FTP Address To add a new address, select [New Address] and enter the address in [Hostname or IP Address]. Port Number Set the port number used by the FTP server. Factory default settings: 21 File Type* Select the file format used for a scanned image. For PDF, the text information is embedded in the PDF. When [OCR] is enabled, text in the scanned data is automatically recognized.
SETTING MODE►ADDRESS BOOK Item Description User Name Enter a user name in the computer to be used for transmission. Password Enter the password associated with the entered user name. Factory default settings: Change Password: Disabled Enable SSL/TLS Use SSL/TLS to encrypt data before transmission. Factory default settings: Disabled Set as Default used Set an address as a default address.
SETTING MODE►ADDRESS BOOK Category Setting A “Category” can be set for an address. By setting a category for an address, the category can be used to filter addresses when searching for that address, making it easier to find the address. Any name can be set for a category. By assigning distinctive names to categories, addresses can be easily sorted. The factory default names are "Category 1" to "Category 32".
SETTING MODE►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS DOCUMENT OPERATIONS Document Operations This setting can also be made by general users. Document Filing Data saved by Document Filing can be manipulated from the Web. Main Folder Files in the Main Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. Item Description Display Style Saved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.
SETTING MODE►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS My Folder Displayed when My Folder is set. Displays the files in My Folder. Allows you to retrieve the specified file. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in "Password of File". Search Item Description User Name Enter the user name. Select from User List Click the [Setup] button and search for users from the list.
SETTING MODE►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS File Batch Print Multiple files can be printed at once by batch printing. Search for the files using search conditions, and then select multiple files from the displayed search results. Click [Print] to print the file. Item Description Search Condition User Name Enter the user name. Select from User List Click the [Setup] button and search for users from the list. Search Folder Select the folder that contains the target file. File Name Enter a file name.
SETTING MODE►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS Submit Print Job In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC, such as a file on another PC connected to the same network. Files that can be printed are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, PCL, PS, XPS, DOCX, PPTX, and XLSX files with extensions pdf, tif, tiff, jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, pcl, ps, xps, docx, pptx, and xlsx. Available only if the MFP supports PostScript.
SETTING MODE►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS Item Description Trimmer Available when the trimming module is installed. Sets the cutting width. Print What Select whether to print the sheet or the entire workbook when printing the Excel file. Output Tray Select the output tray for the print job. Quick File Save the print data in the Quick File Folder of the machine. Print Glossy Select this checkbox if the print job will be printed on glossy paper.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL USER CONTROL User Settings It manages users such as registration of users to log in and user authentication methods. User List Add, edit, and delete users for user authentication, and configure user authentication settings. • [Add] key Add a new user. • [Delete All Users] key Deletes all registered users. (Excluding users stored as factory default.) Only the administrator of the machine can use this function.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Users stored as factory default The following users are stored in the machine at the factory. • Administrator: The administrator account of the machine, stored as factory default. • User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name that is not stored in the machine is entered directly. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.) • Device Account: User*1 • Other User: This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Settings Item User Name Apply User Name to Log-in Name*1 Description This user name is used as the key name in the authentication screen, the user name for document filing, and the sender name. If you want to use the "Automatically print stored jobs after login (page 10-130)" function, register up to 16 double-byte characters. Select this to enter the entered user name in the login name.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Item Pages Limit Group Description Specify the page limit for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups. For more information, see "Pages Limit Group (page 10-46)". Factory default settings: Unlimited Authority Group Specify the user authority by selecting one of the stored authority groups. For more information, see "Authority Group (page 10-47)".
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Access Control Settings Pages Limit Group This is used to register the page limit settings in advance for each group. The page limit for each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered. • [Add] key Use this to add a new group. • List display This shows the currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen for that group. Storing page limit groups When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Authority Group This is used to store the settings relevant to user authorities in advance for each group. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered. • [Add] key Use this to add a new group. • List display This shows the currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen for that group. Storing authority groups When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Item • • • • • All allowed All prohibited All allowed All allowed All prohibited Colour Scan Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed Special Modes Usage Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed Registration/Deletion of Program Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed PDF Creation for PC Browsing Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Allowed Access to Fax Data Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed All allowed All allowed All allo
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Item Description Document Filing Approval Setting:Confidential Mode Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed Print Jobs Other than Print Hold Job Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Pattern Print Input - Direct Entry Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed Total Count Allowed Allowed Allowed Prohibited Allowed Device / Network Status Allowed Allowed Allowed Prohibited Allowed Power Reset Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Proh
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Item * Description Clock Adjust Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Product Key Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Custom Link Setting Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Network Settings Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Security Settings Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Energy Save Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited System Control Allowed Allowed Prohibi
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Favourite Operation Group Favourite Operation Group List For each group, you can register an environment with settings that are convenient for the group. For example, a user who speaks a different language would normally have to change the display language each time he or she uses the machine; however, by registering the language in a favourite operation group in advance, the language is automatically selected when the user logs in.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Item Description Time for Accepting Key Entry of Long Touch Select a time when a long key touch is detected. Double Tap Interval Setting Select an interval when a double tap is detected. Keys Touch Sound Set the sound made when keys are touched. Keyboard Select Set the language that appears on the keyboard. MFP Display Pattern Setting Select the colour pattern used in the touch panel.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Home Screen List Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when registering Favourite Operation Group List. Item Description Name Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name. Select the Home Screen to be the Registration Model Select one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen. When selected, the settings of this home screen are applied.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Resetting user counts Select a user in the setting screen and tap the [Delete] key. A count reset screen for that user will appear. The reset screen will vary depending on whether a single user or multiple users were selected. The items displayed in each case are described in the table below. When a single user is selected Item Description Next Displays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Billing Code Setting Select billing codes. Administration Settings Change the billing code setting. Use Billing Code Switch whether to enable or disable a billing code. Factory default settings: Disabled Use Code Settings A use code is automatically assigned when no billing code is entered. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Register a main code When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. A total of up to 2,000 main and sub codes can be registered. After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit and Register Next] key; you can continuously register the next main code. To end the registration process, tap the [Submit] key. For each setting, see the following "Settings (page 10-56)".
SETTING MODE►USER CONTROL Correct a sub code Selecting a sub code from the list displays the window to correct the sub code. After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit] key; you can apply the corrected contents and complete processing. For each setting, see the following "Settings (page 10-57)". Search for a sub code Enter the sub code and sub code name, then tap the [Search] key; the search result is displayed. Settings Item Description Sub Code Enter the sub code.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS SYSTEM SETTINGS Home Screen Settings You can change the layout, icons, and background of the machine's home screen. This setting requires administrator privileges. Condition Settings Item Description Home Button Position You can select the position of the [Home Screen] key, left or right. Factory default settings: Left Home Screen List The order of arrangement of the shortcut keys in the home screen is indicated by the "No.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Icon Use this setting to register a key icon. Item Icon list Description Use this setting to register icons for home screen shortcut keys. The image files of shortcut key icons are registered in a list. To register an image, click an image file registered in "Name" or "Not Set". Image formats that can be registered are JPEG, GIF, PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, gif, png). The maximum image file size that can be registered is 50 KB.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Copy Settings Condition Settings The following settings are related to copying. Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function). This setting requires administrator privileges. Rotation Copy Setting When the original and paper are placed in different orientations, this function automatically rotates the image 90 degrees to enable correct copying on the paper.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Erase Width Adjustment This is used to set the default erase width for erase function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 25 mm (1") in increments of 1/8" (3 mm) for both edge erase and centre erase. Factory default settings: Edge Clearance Width:10mm (1/2"), Centre Clearance Width:10mm (1/2") Initial Multi Shot Setting Set the default state for Multi Shot.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disables the use of the bypass tray when making 2-sided copies. The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets, transparency film, and other special media for which 2-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these special media enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or damage to the unit may result. If special media for which 2-sided copying is prohibited is often used, it is recommended that you enable this setting.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Quick Scan from Document Glass The resolution for copying using the document glass can be changed from 600 x 600 dpi to 600 x 400 dpi (high speed mode). When high speed mode is selected, the first copy time is quicker, however, the copy image is not as clear. Factory default settings: Disable When high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 400 dpi and attain the fastest speed. • The copy ratio must be set to 100%.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Item Description Output Set the print output method and output tray that are selected by default. Factory default settings: Auto Output Tray Set the default delivery tray. Factory default settings: Varies depending on the machine configuration Offset Set whether or not offset is performed in the default settings. Factory default settings: Enable Separator Page Separator pages can be inserted before or after jobs. Set the paper tray used for the separator pages.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Printer Settings Settings related to the printer function can be configured. Condition Settings Printer condition settings are described below. Prohibit Notice Page Printing Disables to print a notice page. Factory default settings: Enable Prohibit Test Page Printing Disables to print the test page. When this setting is enabled, [Status] → [Data List] → [List for User] → [Printer Test Page] in "Settings" cannot be used to print test pages.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Job Spool Queuing When this function is enabled, received print jobs are displayed in the spool queue of the job status screen. The jobs are moved to the job queue after they have been analyzed by the machine. Multiple jobs that have not yet been analyzed appear in the spool queue. When this function is disabled, received print jobs are displayed in the job queue instead of being displayed in the spool queue.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Interface Settings Settings related to the printer function can be configured. These settings are used to control and monitor data transmitted to the USB port or network port of the machine. Hexadecimal Dump Mode This function is used to print the print data from a computer in hexadecimal format together with the corresponding ASCII text. This mode allows you to check whether or not print data from the PC is being transmitted to the printer correctly.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Status Settings If you print data in an environment where the printer driver is not used (that is, if you print data using the MS-DOS system or if you print data using the PC that does not have the provided printer driver installed), set the detailed printing conditions. (However, the "Disable Blank Page Print" function will be effective even when the PCL printer driver is used.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Setting item Description Separator Page Insert Before Job Insert After Job Factory default settings: Disable Staple Sort*5 None, 1 Staple at Back, 2 Staples, 2 Staples (Top), Stapleless Staple*6 Factory default settings: Off Punch*7 (Punch) (Do not use Punch) Factory default settings: No Punch Fold*8 (Fold the paper) (Do not fold paper) Factory default settings: Insert After Job Fold*9 Set the paper folding.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS PCL Settings This is used to set the symbol sets, fonts, and line feed code used in a PCL environment. Settings Setting item Settings PCL Symbol Set Setting Specify the symbol set used for printing. Factory default settings: PC-8 PCL Font Setting Select a font used for printing. Factory default settings: Internal Font PCL Line Feed Code This setting is used to select how the printer responds when a line feed command is received. Factory default settings: 0.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Print Release Settings Standard Print Release Settings Sets the use of print releases. Factory default settings: Disable Initial Status Settings Print and Delete the Data When [Enable] is selected, [Print and Delete the Data] is enabled in the print screen of the print release job. Factory default settings: Enable Print Order Set the print order from the oldest date, or from the data list number. Factory default settings: Date (Asc.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Port Number Set the port number used for print release in the primary unit and in the secondary unit. Be sure to set the same number in both the primary unit and the secondary unit. (The default port number is "53000", and there is no particular need to change this.) Factory default settings: 53000 Delete All When the machine functions as the primary unit, select this to delete all stored print release jobs.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS E-mail Print Settings Select this option to use the E-mail printing. E-mail Print Set whether or not E-mail print is performed. Factory default settings: Disable POP3 Server Set the POP3 server used for E-mail. Port Number Set the port number of the E-mail server. Factory default settings: 110 POP Authentication Set this to perform POP authentication for E-mail. Factory default settings: Disable User Name Set the E-mail user name.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Direct Print Settings (FTP) Configure these settings if you will be printing files on an FTP server by direct print. A list of available FTP servers is shown. To add an FTP server, click the [Add] button and configure the settings. FTP Server Registration Configure FTP server settings. Name Set the name to be used for direct print. FTP Server Set the name of the FTP server. Port Number Set the port number of the FTP server.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Direct Print Settings (Network Folder) Configure these settings if you will be printing files on a network folder by direct print. A list of available network folders is shown. To add a network folder, click the [Add] button and configure the settings. Registration of Network Folder Configure network folder settings. Name Set the name to be used for direct print. Folder Path Set the folder path that has the files.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Common Settings Settings related to the image send function (E-mail, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured. The operation settings below apply to all image send functions. Condition Settings Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed. Use this setting to hold the settings after scanning is completed (until Auto Clear Mode activates).
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Display all address type regardless of the mode being displayed currently. Displays all destinations regardless of the displayed mode when this setting is enabled. Factory default settings: Disable Enlarging the Address Book An enlarged address book list appears. Factory default settings: Enable Image Orientation Sets the default image orientation.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Be sure to press Next Address Key ([+]) before selecting the next address. Set whether or not the Next Address ([+]) key must be pressed before an address is added for a multi-address job such as broadcast transmission. Factory default settings: Disable Disable Switching of Display Order Disables to change the order of display (search number order, ascending, descending). Once set, the display sequence is not changed.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Enable/Disable Settings Settings to Disable Registration Storing from the machine, storing from Setting mode (Web version), and storing from the PC can each be separately prohibited. Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Disables address control from the machine. Configure the setting for each of the following items: • Group (Direct Entry) • Group (Address Book) Select All: Select all items. Clear Checked: Deselect all items.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Settings to Disable Transmission These settings are used to disable the following transmission operations. Disabling Sending History Prohibits resending using the sending history. Factory default settings: Disable Disable Selection from Address Book Disables the selection of destinations from the address book.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Own Name and Destination Set Stores the Internet-Fax or Fax sender information. Sender Data Registration Use this to store the sender name for fax and Internet fax, the sender fax number, and the sender address for Internet fax. The stored sender name and sender fax number or Internet sender address will be printed at the top of the received fax. Sender Name Enter the default sender name. Sender Fax Number Sets the sender fax number.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Scan Settings The following settings are related to the scanner. Initial Status Settings Default Colour Mode Settings Select a default colour mode setting for both colour and black & white in e-mail address, network folder, FTP and Desktop. Specify "Scanner Common" unless E-mail is specified.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Specified Pages per File Generates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned. If this setting is enabled, a number of pages per file can be specified. Factory default settings: Disable Number of Pages Any number of pages can be specified as the number of pages per file. This setting can be used if [Specified Pages per File] is enabled. Factory default settings: 1 OCR Settings* Configure the settings that are required for OCR.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Condition Settings Default Reply.Address Set The information stored here is used if you do not specify [Reply to] in the send settings when performing Scan to E-mail. Factory default settings: Disable Bcc Setting Enable Bcc Enable this setting if you wish to use Bcc delivery. Displays the [Bcc] key on the image send address book screen.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS File Retention Period Set the save period for scanned data saved in the machine when sending only the URL to the destination. When this period elapses, the files are automatically deleted. Factory default settings: 4 Enable SSL/TLS Use this to protect files using SSL/TLS transmission.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Auto Scan Setting Configure auto scan setting. Factory default settings: Disable Set Image Orientation Automatically The orientation of placed originals can be automatically detected. Set whether the original is scanned by one-sided scanning or two-sided scanning. Factory default settings: Enable Set Resolution Automatically You can have the machine automatically set the resolution.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Default Address Default Address Setting A default address can be stored that makes it possible to transmit by simply pressing the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] key without specifying an address. If [Apply E-mail address of the user for login.] is selected, the E-mail address of the login user is set as the default destination. When [Apply Home Directory of The User for Login] is selected, the default address is the home directory of the user that logged in.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disable selection of other address(es) It is prohibited to send to other than the default destination. Factory default settings: Disable Subject Name Settings Default Subject Set the title of the e-mail, such as sending an e-mail or sending an Internet fax. Pre-Set Registration You can save a preset subject for transmitted files. Click the [Add] key and set the subject.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Message Body Settings Add Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message Body Add Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message Body You can automatically add job information to the body message of e-mail. Factory default settings: Enable Add a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message Body You can add any text as a footer to the body message of e-mail.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Fax Settings You can select the image send settings of fax functions. Condition Settings The fax settings can be enabled or disabled to suit the needs of your workplace. Resolution Setting You can select the resolution setting for faxes. Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Select this to use the resolution at which the fax was sent. If you do not select [Apply the Resolution Set when Stored], the image will be stored at the resolution specified in the pull-down menu.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Transaction Report Print Select Setting Selects whether or not a transaction report will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being printed.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Digital Line Network When this setting is enabled, the send level will be 15 dB or less when you connect to a digital line. Factory default settings: Disable Distinctive Ring Detection This Setting can only be activated in Canada, Australia, New Zealand, and Hong Kong. If multiple telephone numbers have been assigned to your telephone line, the number called can be identified by its ringing pattern.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Printing Page Number at Receiver When the transmitted image is printed by the receiving machine, the page number can be added to the top of each printed page. Factory default settings: Enable Sender Destination Name Switch Allows you to change the destination name and sender fax number if necessary. Factory default settings: Fax No.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Recall in Case of Communication Error This determines how many times the machine will automatically attempt the call again if a fax transmission fails due to a communication error. Number of Times to Recall in Case of Error Specify how many times the machine will attempt the call again when a communication error occurs. During recalling, you can set the number of recall attempts. Any number from 1 to 15 can be selected. Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS If you select "0" for the number of rings, the machine will immediately answer and begin fax reception without ringing in auto reception mode. Switching to Automatic Reception When there is an incoming fax in manual reception mode, it automatically switches to automatic reception. Also, set the number of times the ringer sounds before switching to automatic reception between 1 and 9 times.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding When a problem prevents the machine from printing a received fax, the received fax can be forwarded to another fax machine. This setting is used to program the fax number of the destination fax machine. Only one forwarding fax number can be programmed (maximum of 64 digits). To insert a pause between digits of the number, tap the [-] key.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Fold Size Setting Set the paper size to be used when folding the received data when printing. Factory default settings: Valid except for A4R and Letter-R(8 1/2x11R) Allow/Reject Number Setting Use this setting to specify whether reception from a stored number is to be allowed or rejected. Item Description Reject Reception Reject reception from the stored number. Allow Reception Allow reception from the stored number.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS F-Code Memory Box This section explains how to store memory boxes for various types of F-code communication. Storing a memory box When you tap the [Add New] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 100 F-code memory boxes can be stored for all functions (polling memory, confidential, and relay broadcast). Editing and deleting a memory box When you select a memory box from the list, the edit screen appears for the box. For information on the settings, see "Settings".
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS When programming a new memory box, a sub-address that is already programmed for another box cannot be used. However, the same passcode can be used for more than one memory box. [ ] (space) and [#] cannot be used in a sub-address. A passcode can be omitted. Do not forget the Print PIN. In the event that you forget the Print PIN or need to verify the Print PIN, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Auto Wake Up Print When the [Power] button is "Off" (but the main power switch is "On") and an Internet fax is received, this function activates the machine and prints the fax. When this function is disabled, received Internet faxes are not printed until the ([Power] button) is switched "On".
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS A maximum of 5 pages of body text can be printed. Send Setting These settings are used to configure the settings for Internet fax. I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Rotation Sending Setting When transmitting an image that is one of the following sizes, this function rotates the image 90 degrees counterclockwise. (The setting can be configured separately for each size.) A4, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2"x11", 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R, 16K Factory default settings: All Enabled A4R and 8-1/2" x 11"R size images are not rotated.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Receive Settings Configures the settings for Internet fax. Auto Receive Reduce Setting When a fax is received that includes printed information such as the sender's name and address, the received image is slightly larger than the standard size. This setting is used to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size. Factory default settings: Enable If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of the image outside the standard size will be cut off.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Receiving Date & Time Print Enable this setting to have the date and time of reception printed. Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the Received Image] for the position where the date and time is printed. When [Inside the Received Image] is selected, the date and time of reception is printed on the received image. When [Outside the Received Image] is selected, the received image is reduced and the date and time of reception is printed in the blank area that results.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting Allows or refuses a reception from specified addresses/domains. Item Description Item Reception from the stored address/domain is not allowed. Allow Reception Reception from the stored address/domain is allowed. All Invalid All Invalid Add New Adds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed. Enter the address/domain (maximum of 64 characters) and tap the [Store] key.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Enable SSL/TLS Allows the POP over SSL/TLS communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL/TLS communication or the STLS command. To allow the POP over SSL/TLS communication, set the "Port Number" to the POP over SSL/TLS communication port number. To allow POP over TLS communication, set the "Port Number" to the same port number as for the normal POP3 communication.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Fax Settings Item Description Receive Settings Set the fax reception method. Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then automatically begins fax reception. Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then automatically begins fax reception. Manual Reception: Used when an existing external telephone is connected to the machine.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Internet Fax Settings These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. Reception Start Tap this key to immediately connect to your mail server (POP3 server) and check for received Internet faxes. If you have received Internet faxes, the faxes will be retrieved and printed. Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen This displays the [Internet Fax Manual Reception] key in the base screen of Internet fax mode.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings Inbound Routing Settings The fax and Internet fax received data can be forwarded according to the stored forwarding table. When this function is enabled, you can also have the received Internet faxes forwarded to a specified e-mail address without printing them. Registration of Forward Table You can store or edit the data forwarding table that has the received data forward settings. Up to 50 data forwarding tables can be stored.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Sender Address Registration Stores new sender number or address to be used for inbound routing. List name Settings Address to be Entered Displays the entered sender number or address. Fax Number Enter a facsimile number to be stored as the sender. When you enter multiple sender numbers, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,). When you tap the [Global Address Search] key, the global address search screen appears.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 Enable the [Inbound Routing] function. 2 Store the sender number or address. Tap the [Administration Settings] from the menu. Enable the [Inbound Routing] function from the setting screen. Tap the [Sender Number/Address Registration] from the menu. Enter the destination number or address that you wish to store. If you wish to forward all received data, you need not store the sender number and address separately. 3 Store a forwarding table.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Item Description File format Select the file format for inbound routing. Factory default settings: PDF Preset of Character Set the characters added to the file name when a file is saved. When "Character 1" and "Character 2" are set in "File Naming No. 1 to No. 7", the set characters are added to the file name. Enter up to 64 full-width/half-width characters. File Naming No.1 to No.7 Set the information included in the file name when saving a file.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Metadata Settings If the Application Integration Kit is installed, you can control the metadata to be used in other applications. The stored metadata is displayed on the metadata settings page. You can add a metadata, and edit or delete an existing metadata. • [Add] key Adds a new metadata set. • List display Lists the currently stored metadata sets. Metadata Delivery Enables or disables the metadata delivery function.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Item To Be Used as Default Description The current metadata set is used as the default. Factory default settings: Disable Document Filing Settings Condition Settings Document filing settings are described below. Tap the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings. Default Mode Settings Specifies which mode, Sharing or Confidential, is used as the default mode when storing a file.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Default Colour Mode Settings Selects the default settings for black & white and colour when Scan to Local Drive is used. The following settings can be configured. • Auto • Full Colour • Greyscale • Mono2 Factory default settings: Auto, Mono2 Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode Disables black & white settings from the base screen when the colour mode is set to Auto.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling Text/Stamp printing at Reprint When a stored file is retrieved and printed, the printing functions are disabled. This function prevents an inconsistency of the date between the original data and output data and others. Factory default settings: Disable Batch Print Settings Set whether or not the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key are prohibited in the user name selection screen when printing all files.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Document Output Options The use of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored. The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine. Item Description Print For each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed. Factory default settings: Copy: Enable, Printer: Enable, Scan Send: Disable, Internet Fax Send(Incl. PC-I-Fax): Disable, Fax Send(Incl.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Automatic Deletion of File Settings Document filing settings are described below. Tap the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings. Time and folder settings can be configured to have files in specified folders (stored by document filing) automatically deleted at a specified time. Up to 3 settings can be stored to be automatically deleted. The procedure for using this function is as follows: (1) Select [Setting 1], [Setting 2], or [Setting 3].
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Sharp OSA Settings Condition Settings Sharp OSA version Displays the version of Sharp OSA Settings by this unit. Cookie Settings Specify how application cookies are handled when using an application in Sharp OSA. When "Hold Cookie" is selected, the machine holds cookies that are used in an application. When "Not hold Cookie" is selected, cookies are not held when an application is used.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Standard Application Settings The standard application settings can be added and controlled. • [Add] key When "Hold Cookie" is selected, the machine holds cookies that are used in an application. • List display When "Not hold Cookie" is selected, cookies are not held when an application is used. Store Standard Application When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 64 items can be stored. For information on the settings, see "Settings".
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Receiving Application Setting The Fax or I-Fax Receive functions can be set in the Sharp OSA applications. Settings Item Description Forward to Application The Fax or I-Fax message reception can be controlled by Sharp OSA applications. Application Name Enter the application name to receive. Address for Web Service Enter the Web service address. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Embedded Application Settings Store and manage "embedded applications" that are installed in the machine. • [Add] key Adds a new embedded application. • List display Lists the currently installed embedded applications. Install Embedded Application When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. You can install up to 64 in total. • When installing from the operation panel of the machine, the files in the USB memory connected to the machine are installed.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS External Service Connect Enable the cloud connector function you want to use. The following cloud connector functions can be set.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Authentication Settings Default Settings User Authentication This setting enables or disables user authentication and specifies the authentication method. When the user authentication is enabled, each user of the machine is registered. When a user logs in, the separate authentication settings apply to the user. This function allows greater control of security and cost management than that on previous machines.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Specify network server access control Register the access control information for page count limits, authorities, and favourite operations can be registered on an network server in advance. By using this network server for network authentication, perform the user authentication based on the registered access control information. Use this function when user authentication is performed by network authentication using an LDAP server or a directory service (Active Directory, etc.).
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS • If Access Control is enabled and the access control information cannot be acquired from the authentication server, user authentication will not be possible. • If a user that is registered in the machine is authenticated by network authentication, the user registration settings in the machine will be given priority for the page count limit group, authority group, favourite operations group, and my folder.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Case sensitivity of login name is enabled. Set whether or not to make login names used at the time of user authentication case sensitive. If the checkbox is set to , login names with identical spelling but different cases (upper and lower) will be identified as different login names. Therefore, login names with identical spelling but different cases will be authenticated as user names of different users. If the checkbox is set to , case sensitivity for login names is disabled.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Enable Offline Authentication with stored User Information Allows the machine to be used in the event of a network failure, even when using network-based user authentication. Factory default settings: Disable Enable Personalization when external authentication is used Even if you use external authentication such as LDAP authentication, you can customize it for each user. The items that can be customized are as follows.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Administration Settings Disable Printing by Invalid User Print jobs by users who have not registered user information in this machine, such as jobs for which appropriate user information has not been entered in the printer driver or when "DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER (page 4-88)" is entered from the setting mode (administrator), are prohibited.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Actions when the user is authenticated Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs This setting determines whether or not a job will be completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in progress. The following settings can be configured.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Card Reader Settings Condition Settings Card Scan Test Perform a read test of the card to be used. Card ID Registration/Change Authority Set whether the logged-in user can register/change/delete his/her card ID information in this machine. Factory default settings: Disable Check System Code only in FeliCa User Area mode Check the System Code only in FeliCa User Area mode.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Paper Settings Paper Tray Settings Paper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section. These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray. When the [Tray Settings] key is tapped, a list appears showing the trays and the current settings.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS • If the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded into a tray, a problem or misfeed may occur when printing. • To change the paper size in a tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER (page 1-11)". • Paper properties such as "Fixed Paper Side" are automatically set when the paper type is selected. The paper tray properties cannot be changed in this screen.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Paper Tray Bypass Tray Inserter (Upper) Inserter (Lower) Paper Type Size Plain 1/2, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1 to 4*1, Thin Paper, Glossy Paper, User Type 1 to 8 Auto-AB (A3W (12" × 18"), A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, A6R*3, 4, 11" × 17", 216 mm × 330 mm (8-1/2" × 13")*2, 216 mm × 340 mm (8-1/2" × 13-2/5")*2, 216 mm × 343 mm (8-1/2" × 13-1/2")*2, 8-1/2" × 11"), Auto-Inch (12" × 18" (A3W), 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14"*2, 8-1/2" × 13-2
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Custom Size Registration (Bypass) If you frequently use a non-standard size paper in the bypass tray, register that paper size in advance. Registering the paper size saves you the trouble of setting the size each time you need to use it. Up to Seven paper sizes can be registered. Tap the key ([Custom 1] to [Custom 7]) in which you wish to register or change a paper size, and the registration screen appears.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Operation Settings Condition Settings Enlarge Display Mode Displays large characters on the screen. appears in the system area when Large Character Mode is enabled. Factory default settings: Disable Message Time Setting The duration of time that messages appear in the touch panel (the time until a message is automatically cleared) can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 12.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Display Confirmation Dialog when job is cancelled. Set whether to display a notification message when a job is completed. Factory default settings: Disable Display Status Notification Message Show a confirmation dialog box when a job is cancelled. Factory default settings: Enable Restrict Total Count display When this setting is enabled, the total count is hidden when checking the total count from the home screen.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Key Operation Setting Auto Clear Setting The time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any number of seconds from 10 to 240 in increments of 10 seconds. If the machine is not used for the duration of time set here, the auto clear function will clear any settings that have been selected and return the screen to the base screen of copy mode or the job status screen. Factory default settings: 60 seconds Cancel Timer This is used to disable the auto clear function.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Original Count Setting Specifies whether or not "Original Count" in Others is enabled for each function. Copier • Copier Image Send • Scan • Internet Fax • Fax • Data Entry Document Filing • Scan to Local Drive Factory default settings: All Invalid Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown. This is displayed when a facsimile expansion kit or Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Operation by User Who Has Password • Operational Authority: This is used to allow a user who has a password to operate the machine remotely. For information on the password, consult your service technician. • View Password Entry Screen: When operating the machine by remote control using the remote software, the password entry screen will appear on both the computer and the machine, or on only the computer.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Favourite Key Setting Set the information that appears when favourite keys are tapped in normal mode. Click the Copy, Scan, Internet Fax, Fax, and Data Entry tabs to configure settings for the favourite key screens shown in each of the normal modes. Favourite Key Number Sets the favourite key number. The items appear will appear in order on the screen starting from the item that is set in No. 1. Key Name Enter a maximum of 20 characters for the favourite key name.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Device Control Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. Condition Settings Original Size Detector Setting One of the 8 groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection function.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Original Feeding Mode The following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, and scan to local drive. When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time you need to use it. • Mixed Size Doc. Same Width • Mixed Size Doc. Different Width • Slow Scan Mode* • Skip blank paper If you select Skip blank paper, select [Blank Page Skip] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow].
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Plain Paper Compatibility Settings Set the basis weight of plain paper that is normally used. Select from Plain1 and Plain2. The weight of Plain Paper 1 is 60 to 89 g/m2 (16 to 24 lbs bond). The weight of Plain Paper 2 is 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond).
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling of Finisher This setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle stitch finisher, such as when it malfunctions. Factory default settings: Disable Disabling of Folding Unit It is used when the use of the paper folding unit is prohibited or when it breaks down. Factory default settings: Disable Disabling of Trimming Module This setting is used to disable the trimming module.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Clock Adjust Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock. Item Description Specify Time Zone If your region is ahead of GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), select [+]. If your region is behind GMT, select [-]. Next, specify the time difference between your region and GMT in hours and minutes. (Example: If your region is Japan, + 9 hours 00 minutes.) Date&Time Settings Select and set the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Date Format The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed. Item Description Current Setting The current time appears in the format set in Date Format. Format Set the order of display of the year, month, and day (YYYY/MM/DD). Factory default settings: DD/MM/YYYY Separator Select one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Enable/Disable Settings The following settings enables or disables certain functions. The prohibited setting items in the settings of each function such as copy settings and the items in this prohibited setting are linked. Authentication Settings Disable Home Edit Mode when in Device Account Mode Disable Home Edit Mode when in Device Account Mode.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Printer Settings Prohibit Notice Page Printing Disables to print a notice page. Factory default settings: Enable Prohibit Test Page Printing Disables to print the test page. When this setting is enabled, [Status] → [Data List] → [List for User] → [Printer Test Page] in "Settings" cannot be used to print test pages.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Settings to Disable Registration Disable Registering Destination on Web Page Disables to store the destination from Setting mode (Web version). Configure the setting for each of the following items: • Group (Direct Entry) • Group (Address Book) • Contacts Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections. Factory default settings: All Invalid Disable Registration/Delection of All Program Items Disables the use of address book when a program is stored.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disable Direct Entry Disables the direct entry of destination address and others. Configure the setting for each of the following items: • E-mail • Network Folder • Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP) • Fax Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections. Factory default settings: All Invalid Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission This prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission. Factory default settings: Disable Disable PC-Fax Transmission This prohibits PC-Fax transmission.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling Recent Jobs Prohibit the use of [Recent Jobs]. Factory default settings: Disable Device Control Disabling of Document Feeder Use this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions. (When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible using the document glass.) Factory default settings: Disable Disabling of Duplex This is used to disable 2-sided printing, such as when the duplex module malfunctions.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Product Key/Application Number Input Enter the product key and application number to use the extensions below. Serial Number Barcode Font Kit Internet Fax Expansion Kit Internet Fax Expansion Kit E-mail Alert and Status Application Integration Module Virus Detection Kit Enter the product key and application number for the above functions. Depending on the activation status of the extended function of the machine, the items displayed will change.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Powering Off Sound Control the machine power off notification sound level, or turns the sound off. Factory default settings: Middle Caution Sound Settings Set whether to play a notification sound when the machine is in the following status.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Network Settings Quick Settings Select the minimum required settings for the machine connection to the network. Wireless Settings Connection Type Switch between [Wired Only], [Wired + wireless (access point)], [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)] or [Wired+Wireless (Wi-Fi Direct Mode)] according to the network connection status.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Show Security Key If it is set to ON, the security key appears. Factory default settings:No Sound IPv4 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine. The settings are shown below. DHCP Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)/BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol).
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS SMTP Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server. Sender Name Enter the sender name. Sender Address If data transmission has failed, the undelivered e-mail may be returned from the server. Enter an e-mail address (a single address only) to receive such undelivered mails. Usually, enter the e-mail address of system administrator.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Change PIN Code/Password To change the password, set . Authentication Select the authentication server from the drop-down list. Factory default settings: Anonymous KDC Server Enter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server. Realm Enter the Kerberos realm. Enable SSL/TLS If is set, the SSL/TLS encryption communication is enabled. Connection Test Tap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the LDAP server.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS IPv4 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine. The settings are shown below. DHCP Use this setting to have the IP address obtained utomatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address. Factory default settings: Enable If DHCP/BOOTP is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS DNS Settings IPv4 Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address of primary DNS server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server. IPv6 Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address of primary DNS server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server. Domain Name Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists. Dynamic DNS Updating Set this option to use the dynamic updating of DNS server. Factory default settings: Disable IEEE802.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Number of EAP Retries Set the number of times to re-access the EAP when communication fails. Factory default settings: 3 Time(s) Certificate Status Shows the status of the certificate required for transmission using IEEE802.1X. To install a certificate, click [Install]. CA Certificate Status Shows the status of the CA certificate required for transmission using IEEE802.1X. To install a certificate, click [Install].
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS User Name Enter the user name. Password Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to . POP before SMTP If is set, you are authenticated to the POP server before using the SMTP communication. • POP3 Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server. Factory default settings: Disable • Port Number: Enter the POP3 port number for POP before SMTP communication. The default setting is port 110.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Timeout Enter a timeout. Factory default settings: 5 seconds Synchronous Interval Enter an interval to synchronize to the SNTP server. Factory default settings: 6 Hour Synchronize Upon Start To establish synchronization during machine startup, set to . Factory default settings: Disable Synchronize Now When tapped, the machine is synchronized with the SNTP server time. mDNS mDNS Settings mDNS Set this option to use the mDNS settings.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 Settings Set this option to use the SNMPv3 settings. Factory default settings: Disable User Name Enter the user name. Authentication Key Enter the authentication key. Factory default settings: Algorithm:MD5 Privacy Key Enter the privacy key. Factory default settings: Algorithm Context Name Display the context name. SMB SMB Settings (Server) Set the version of SMB protocol that is used for functions such as public folder/NAS.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS RAW Raw Print Settings Raw Print Set this option to use RAW printing. Factory default settings: Enable Port Number Enter a port number. Factory default settings: 9100 Timeout Enter a timeout. Factory default settings: 90 seconds Use Bidirectional To use bidirectional communication, set to . Factory default settings: Disable WSD WSD Settings WSD Print Set this option to use WSD printing.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS External Print Services Settings For AirPrint Settings, see the "AirPrint Guide". Universal Print Settings Universal Print Sets whether the Universal Print service is used. Factory default settings: Enable Enabling this setting will automatically enable IPP INFRA on the Client Port in the Port Control. Status Displays the current status of the Universal Print service. Printer Name Set the print name for use with the machine's Universal Print service.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Settings Setting item Settings Name Enter the address book name. Default Address Setting Enters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree. Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = Everyone Entries must be separated from each other by semicolons or commas. LDAP server: Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server. Server Type Select the Default or Custom from the service type list.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Setting item Password Settings Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to . Authentication Select the authentication server from the drop-down list. Bind Prefix Set the Bind prefix. Factory default settings: uid Server Usage Set the server application. Set the address book and user authentication.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Active Directory Settings This section describes the items to be set in the Active Directory settings of the system settings among the settings to be made when using Active Directory on this machine. Search Attribute Set search attributes. Factory default settings: cn Linkage with User Control Function Pages Limit Group Enter when setting the usage restriction group. Factory default settings: pagelimit Authority Group Enter when setting the permission group.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Proxy Setting Access the network through a proxy server. Settings Item Description Proxy Setting Access the network through a proxy server. Factory default settings: Disable Proxy Server Address Enter the proxy server address. User Name Enter a user name to access the proxy server. Password Enter a password to allow access to the proxy server. Port Number Enter the proxy server port number.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Wireless Settings Used to enable or disable the wireless LAN and show the status of wireless LAN. Connection Type Switch between [Wired Only], [Wired + wireless (access point)], [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)] or [Wired+Wireless (Wi-Fi Direct Mode)] according to the network connection status. Factory default settings: Wired + wireless (access point) Keep Wireless Access Point activated This can be set only when "Connection Type" is "Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)".
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Security Type Select a security type. Factory default settings: WPA/WPA2-mixed Personal Encry. Select an encryption type. Factory default settings: AES Security Key Enter a security key.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS SSID Enter the SSID. Security Type Select a security type. Factory default settings: None Encry. Select an encryption type. Factory default settings: None Security Key Enter a security key.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Access Point Search Click this to search access points. When the search results are displayed, select the access point to use and click [OK]. [SSID], [Security Type], and [Encry.] are automatically applied. Name Enter the name of the connection destination. SSID Enter the SSID. Security Type Select a security type. Factory default settings: WPA2 Personal Encry. Select an encryption type. Factory default settings: AES Security Key Enter a security key.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS View Login User The user or users who have logged in this machine are displayed. Current Login Users Shows the currently logged in user and IP address. Log Out All Users The current login users are logged out. When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. For details on restarting this machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10)".
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Security Settings When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. For details on restarting this machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10)". Password Setting Password Policy Settings This setting is used when you want to set a more strict password or when users who have not logged in for a specified period of time are to be deleted.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Enable Password Creation Rules When setting a password, make sure that it contains at least one or more numbers, uppercase and lowercase letters of the alphabet, and symbols. The characters that can be entered are as follows. • Numbers: 0 to 9 • Upper case alphabet: A to Z • Lower case alphabet: a to z • Symbols: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) “ ‘ + , - . / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] _ ` { | } ~ and spaces If you enable this setting, you will need to enter at least four characters: one each for nu
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Prohibit Reuse of Deleted User’s Account Name Prohibits the reregistration of user accounts (login names) once they have been deleted. This setting can be used to prohibit reregistration for a certain period of time or for no period of time. After enabling the setting, set the period of time to prohibit reregistration. If you select "Undefined", you can prohibit reregistration without setting a period. If [Case sensitivity of login name is enabled.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Condition Settings Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job You can select settings to cancel print jobs that are not print hold jobs, or force all print jobs to be held. When [Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job] is turned ON, the settings below can be selected. Item Description Force Retention This setting forcibly sets all print jobs as print hold jobs, even jobs for which print hold is not selected.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Port Control For the various major ports used in the system, set the prohibition/permission and port number, and tap the [Register] key. The ports that can be set are as follows.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS MAC Address Filter Settings This option sets a MAC address. It allows access to the machine from the MAC address you set. Intrusion/Attack Detection This section explains how to protect the machine by partially blocking communications with an attempt to attack the machine via network. If the multifunction device receives more than the set number of communications from the same IP address within the set period, communication from that IP address is prohibited.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS List of Denied IP Addresses Item Description IP Address Displays the IP address that is rejected. The default setting is "OFF". Start Time of Incoming Packet Denials Displays the date and time when reception refusal started. Total Displays the number registered in the reception rejection list. Factory default settings: Allow Virus Scan Setting This setting is available when the virus detection kit is installed. Specifies the settings for virus detection.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Every Month When this setting is enabled, virus scan will be performed on the specified day and time. (Date) Sets the date when the scan will start. For months that have days that do not exist (for example, February and April when 31 is set), run at the end of the month. Factory default settings:1 (Start time) Sets the time to start scanning. Factory default settings:12:00 Virus Scan Target Select the data to be scanned for viruses.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS SSL/TLS Settings SSL/TLS can be used for data transmission over a network. SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of information communicated over a network. Encrypting data makes it possible to transmit and receive sensitive information safely. Data encryption can be set by the following protocols. Setting of SSL/TLS Server Port • HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication. Factory default settings: Enable • IPP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP communication.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS S/MIME Settings S/MIME Settings Sets whether or not to use S/MIME for scan to E-mail. Factory default settings: Disable Device Certificate Certificate Status Shows the status of the certificate required for sending using S/MIME. If you want to install the certificate, click the [Select] key. Sign Settings Sign E-mail Enable "Sign E-mail" to use a signature. Factory default settings: Always Enable Signature Algorithm Set the algorithm for the signature.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS IPsec Settings IPsec can be used for data transmission/reception on a network. When IPsec is used, data can be sent and received safely without the need to configure settings for IP packet encryption in a Web browser or other higher-level application. When enabling this settings, take the following notes. • It may take some time to reflect on the machine settings, and you cannot connect to the machine during this time.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Filter Mode Configure settings for the authentication method used for IPsec. Factory default settings: IPsec IPsec Encryption Configure settings for the authentication method used for IPsec. ESP Select to use ESP authentication. Factory default settings: Enable Allow Communication not using ESP Specify whether or not communication that does not use ESP is allowed. Factory default settings: Enable AH Select to use AH authentication.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Document Administration Function All of the transmitted image data (sent or received by facsimile or e-mail transfer) can be forwarded to any destination. List name Settings Forwarding Destination Settings (Send Data) Forward Send Data Set a destination to forward the send data. Factory default settings: Disable E-mail/Network Folder/FTP/Desktop Select a forwarding type of the send or received image data. When determined, select the destination from the address book.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Hidden Pattern Print Setting Select Hidden Pattern Print Setting. The hidden pattern print function is effective at preventing unauthorised copying as the specified text emerges in the background on output sheets. Initial Status Settings Default Settings Item Description Hidden Pattern Print Setting A pattern print can be printed with this settings. Factory default settings: All Invalid Exposure Select an exposure.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Contrast Set a character contrast. The black can be set in any of 9 levels. Factory default settings: 5 Custom Text Registration Stores the user-created print characters. Up to 30 characters can be stored. Tracking Information Print Prints the tracking information at the top or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed. This function forcibly prints the pre-specified traceable information to prevent an unauthorised copy.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Audit Log Logs are created and saved for various events relating to security functions and settings. Audit logs are created and saved in English. However, setting values such as filenames which are input from external sources are saved as-is. Audit logs which have been saved in the internal storage can be exported by an administrator to a PC as TSV files. You can select either the internal storage or an external server as the destination for saving audit logs.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Event name Date & Time*1 Operation I/F*2 Login Name Result*3 Additional Information Audit Start Yes N/A N/A Yes Reasons for starting Normal start-up: main power on, panel SW pressed, reboot, timer, fax, network, waste paper tray fax paper removal, other Other: security erase Audit End Yes N/A N/A Yes N/A Job Completion Yes Yes Job owner (SYSTEM) Yes Finished job name I&A Success Yes Yes The string entered as your login name N/A IP address of the log
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Event name Date & Time*1 Operation I/F*2 Login Name Result*3 Additional Information Modify AddrBook Yes Yes User who updated Yes • At the time of addition: Internal management ID and destination name of the added entry • When deleting / changing: Internal management ID of deleted / changed entry Firm Update Yes Yes User who updated Yes • Firmware name • Firmware version before update • Firmware version after update Intrusion/Attack Detected Yes N/A N/A Yes
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Event name Date & Time*1 Operation I/F*2 Login Name Result*3 Additional Information On-demand Virus Scan Yes Ope/Web Users who requested the scan to be performed Success/ In case of failure, the reason Failure • Interruption of running scan due to power off Interruption of the scan • Any other reason Interruption of a running scan due to other than the above • Scan failure due to errors other than the above Virus Detection Yes N/A N/A Always One of the following
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Certificate Management Device Certificate Management Import Import the certificate/private key. This setting can only be set on web pages. Export Export the certificate/private key. This setting can only be set on web pages. Certificate Information Shows the status of the certificate. Creation of Certificate and Private Key This setting can only be set on web pages. Common Name (Required) Enter the name to be used. Organization Enter the name of the organization.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Management Install Install the certificate. Certificate Information Shows the status of the certificate. Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR) Common Name (Required) Enter the name to be used. Organization Enter the name of the organization. Organizational Unit Enter the name of the unit within the organization. City/Locality Enter the city or locality. State/Province Enter the state or province.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Energy Save Eco Setting The machine's power consumption can be reduced by Eco Mode setting. Although each function setting can be changed separately, the machine has the "Custom" and "Eco Mode" to allow simultaneous changing of settings. Eco Recommendation Function You can display eco-recommended functions such as two-sided printing and N-Up during copying, document filing print, and direct print. Setting values applied by each mode is as follows.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Preheat Mode Setting The time until the preheating mode works is 1 to 120 minutes in 1-minute units. Preheat Mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses after printing ends and no further operations are performed. This function reduces your power costs, and at the same time helps conserve natural resources and reduce pollution. Select the time that best suits the needs of your workplace. The panel display can be turned Off in the Preheat mode.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Change transition time by time of day. This function controls the transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of the machine based on job logs obtained during a 4-week period. When this setting is enabled, the [Fix transition time.] option is disabled. Factory default settings: Disable • The image transfer control settings are not changed. • This does not link to the Power On/Off Scheduling.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Manual You can set a pattern for each time band. The machine already has the 3-pattern template. The Energy Save pattern can be added to the "Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4". Three-pattern template Template Pattern Description of mode Template 1 All "Energy Save Priority 2" The machine runs in the "Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)" all the time.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Energy Saving Pattern List This function analyzes machine usage and controls entry into auto power shut-off mode based on frequency of use. If you want to manage machine power by using an energy saving pattern list, select [Manual] in [System Settings] - [Eco Setting] - [Change transition time by time of day.], and select an Automatic Update Pattern from the pull-down list or one of Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS "Pattern" tab This tab is used to configure the details of an energy saving pattern. Item Description Energy Save Operation Select a specific date pattern you want to specify. Change Pattern Name Enter a pattern name when you want to change the name of a specific date pattern. Pattern to Be Modeled Select a source pattern when you create a pattern using a stored or preset pattern. Add new schedule. Add a schedule. "Holiday" tab Specify a holiday.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS System Control Job Log View Job Log Views log of a job executed on the machine. Select a view item and period, and tap the [Show] key. Factory default settings: Job Log:All Enabled Job log Operation Deletes or stores log of a job executed on the machine. Set the number of jobs for [The Number of Job Log to Notify by E-mail] and click [Store]. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the job log.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Storage Backup Address book information and user information stored in the machine can be saved to and retrieved from a USB memory device. To use the machine to manipulate a file, first insert the USB memory device in the machine. If you need to select settings on the Web page, use your computer to manipulate the file. Export Settings Exports data. Factory default settings: All Invalid Import Settings Imports data into the machine.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Filing Data Backup You can back up a file saved with Document Filing, and restore a backed up file to the machine. Backup of filing data is operated in the setting mode (Web version). Export Settings Select the folder you want to back up and click [Execute]. The files are saved to your computer. Item Description Index The displayed Folder names can be filtered by index. Display Items Set the number of files that are displayed.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS E-mail Alert and Status Status Message Selects the Standard E-mail Status function or Advanced E-mail Status function settings. The E-mail Status function can periodically transmit the machine status information to the stored address. Standard Sets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address list separately.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Alerts Message Selects the E-mail Alert function settings. The E-mail Alert function can report a trouble of the machine to the administrator or dealer using e-mail. Sets the E-mail Alert Message List 1, E-mail Alert Message List 2, and Dealer E-mail Alert Message List separately. E-mail Address Enter the destination E-mail address for alert message transmission. You can enter multiple addresses by separating them by a semicolon or comma. Example: aaa@xxxxx.□□□; bbb@xxxxx.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Password Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to . POP before SMTP If is set, you are authenticated to the POP server before using the SMTP communication. • POP3 Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server. • Port Number: Enter the POP3 port number for POP before SMTP communication. The default setting is port 110.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Image Quality Adjustment Fusing Cleaning Mode in [Collective Adjustment], and all Common Functions can only be executed in setting mode on the machine. Collective Adjustment Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. Fusing Cleaning Mode Use this function to clean the machine's fusing unit when dots or other dirt appear on the printed side of the paper. When this function is executed, "V" printed paper is output and the fusing unit is cleaned.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Copy Image Quality Quick Image Quality Adjustment You can easily perform copy quality adjustment in the default state. You can change the default setting ([2]) to [1 (Smooth)] or [3 (Sharp)]. Factory default settings:2 Grey Balance You can adjust the gradation, and density of copies. The density is divided into 3 ranges and you can adjust the level.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Exposure Adjustment Set the density of printing. Factory default settings: 3 (Normal) Line Thickness When lines do not print correctly in special applications such as CAD, you can make lines thicker. Factory default settings:5 Scan Image Quality RGB Adjust Set the colour tone (RGB) for scanning. Factory default settings: All 0 Sharpness Use this setting to obtain a sharp image when scanning an original.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Density Smoothing Adjustment If uneven density occurs in a copy and others, use this function to smooth the density. The uneven density is automatically corrected by scanning a test patch that you print. After the [Execute] key is tapped and a test patch is printed, a message appears prompting you to begin automatic calibration. Follow the instructions in the message to perform density smoothing.
SETTING MODE►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Installation Settings This is a group of settings that are required when you initially install the machine. The initial installation setting items are the same as the regular setting items that have the same name. For information on a setting item, see the explanation of the regular item.
TROUBLESHOOTING Q&A GENERAL PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 CHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 COPYING PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21 CHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21 PRINTING PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27 CHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27 FAX PROBLEMS . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Q&A GENERAL PROBLEMS Have functions been disabled by the administrator? Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS ? Problem Check Page Is too much paper loaded into the document feeder tray? 11-9 Is the original a long original? 11-9 Is the original on thin paper? 11-9 Is the original on heavy paper? 11-9 Is the feed roller dirty? 11-9 MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ARE FED AT THE SAME TIME AND CANNOT BE LOADED CORRECTLY (AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER) Are your originals warped or folded? Are you using a pasted originals? 11-9 THE EJECTED MANUSCRIPTS ARE NOT ALIGNED NEATLY (AUTOMATIC DO
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS ? Problem Check Page WHEN PRINTING ON THICK PAPER, THE PRINT RESULT IS DIRTY FROM THE 2ND PAGE ON Has the paper type been set correctly? 11-13 I DON'T KNOW HOW TO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAY Did you change the output tray? 11-14 PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFF Has the correct paper size been set? 11-14 Was the original placed in the correct position? 11-14 PRINTING TAKES PLACE ON THE WRONG SIDE OF THE PAPER Is the paper loaded with the print side facing in the correct
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS ? Problem Check Page I DON'T KNOW HOW TO ADD A SHORTCUT TO OR DELETE A SHORTCUT FROM THE HOME SCREEN You can change a shortcut in "Edit Home". 11-19 I DON'T KNOW HOW TO RESTORE THE LARGE TEXT SETTING TO ITS ORGINAL STATE Is large text mode enabled in the home screen? 11-19 I DON'T KNOW HOW TO ADJUST THE TIME THE MACHINE ENTERS ENERGY SAVE MODE Set the time the machine enters energy save mode in the Energy Save settings of setting mode.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check ! Solution Did you just power on the machine? ■ Wait until a message appears indicating that the machine is ready. After the [Power] button is turned on, the machine requires some time to complete warmup operation. During warmup operation, functions can be selected, but a job cannot be run. Is the main power indicator blinking? ■ Auto Power Shut-Off mode has activated. To return the machine to normal operation, press the [Power] button.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check ! Solution Is there are problem in the installation location or installation environment? ■ Check the installation location and installation environment. The motion sensor may not operate correctly in the conditions below.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE ORIGINAL SIZE IS NOT AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED OR THE WRONG SIZE IS SELECTED Check ! Solution Is the original curled or folded? ■ Straighten the original. The correct original size cannot be detected if the original is curled or folded. Did you place an original smaller than A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2" for inch settings) size on the document glass? ■ Select the original size manually. Original sizes smaller than A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") cannot be detected automatically.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE ORIGINAL MISFEEDS (AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER) Check ! Solution Is too much paper loaded into the document feeder tray? ■ Make sure that the stack of paper in the tray is not higher than the indicator line. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-34) Is the original a long original? ■ When using the automatic document feeder to scan a long original, set the scan size to [Long Size]. (Note that long originals cannot be copied using the copy function.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE EJECTED MANUSCRIPTS ARE NOT ALIGNED NEATLY (AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER) Check Is the manuscript set correctly? Depending on the condition of the original, the type of paper, the temperature at the time of use, and the humidity environment, the ejected originals may not be aligned neatly.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check ! Solution Are you using punched paper? ■ When using punched paper, set the paper type to punched. "Settings" → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings] → [Tray Registration] Are you using label sheets that cannot be used? ■ Labels without a carrier sheet may stick to the transfer surface and cause a misfeed. Remove the paper, turn it over, and reload it. Using a different paper type may solve the problem.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE OUTPUT IS NOTICEABLY CURLED AND UNEVEN Check Remove the paper, turn it over, and reload it. Using a different paper type may solve the problem. ! Solution ■ This may improve some states of paper curling. LOADING PAPER (page 1-11) THE IMAGE IS SKEWED ON THE PAPER Check ! Solution Is too much paper loaded into the bypass tray? ■ Reload the paper. Load no more than the maximum number of sheets and do not exceed the indicator line.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS SMUDGES APPEAR ON PRINTED OUTPUT Check ! Solution Are you using paper that is not within the specifications? ■ Use SHARP-recommended paper. Using paper that is for other models or special paper that is not supported may result in misfeeds, creases, or smudges. - "SUPPLIES" in Start Guide ■ Try setting the paper type to a type that is slightly heavier or slightly lighter than normal.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS I DON'T KNOW HOW TO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAY Check Did you change the output tray? ! Solution ■ When copying, you can select the output tray in normal mode. Tap [Output] in the base screen of normal mode. You can set the output tray in the screens. When printing, you can select the output tray in the printer driver. Click the [Finishing] tab in the printer driver, and select the output tray in [Output Tray].
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS A COVER OR INSERT IS NOT PRINTED ON THE SPECIFIED PAPER Check Has the paper type been set correctly? ! Solution ■ Set the correct paper type for the tray that contains the paper specified for the cover or insert. If the paper type set for the cover or insert is not the same as the paper type set for the tray, paper will be fed from a different tray.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS STAPLING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE (INCLUDING SADDLE STITCH) Check ! Solution Does a message appear instructing you to check the staple unit? ■ Remove jammed staples. PERIPHERAL DEVICES (page 1-41) Does a message appear instructing you to add staples? ■ Replace the staple cartridge. Do not forget to replace the staple case.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE STAPLING POSITION OR PUNCH POSITION IS NOT CORRECT Check ! Solution Is the stapling position setting correctly? ■ Check the stapling position in "PREVIEW SCREEN". Are the punching positions setting correctly? ■ Check the punch position in "PREVIEW SCREEN". FOLDING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE Check ! Solution Is it a paper size that can be folded? ■ Check the paper size that can be folded.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY IS DIFFICULT TO VIEW Check Is the brightness properly adjusted? ! Solution ■ Tap the [LCD Control] key ( ) on the home screen to adjust the brightness. YOU WERE LOGGED OUT WITHOUT LOGGING OUT YOURSELF Check Did Auto Clear activate? ! Solution ■ When user authentication is used, the currently logged in user will be automatically logged out if Auto Clear activates. Log in again.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS I DON'T KNOW HOW TO ADD A SHORTCUT TO OR DELETE A SHORTCUT FROM THE HOME SCREEN Check You can change a shortcut in "Edit Home". ! Solution ■ Open the action panel on the home screen and tap [Edit Home]. Enter the administrator password, tap the desired location and add a shortcut, or tap a shortcut and delete. For more information, see EDITING THE HOME SCREEN (page 2-18).
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS I DON'T KNOW WHOM TO CONTACT FOR MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Check Please check the customer support information. ! Solution ■ Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS COPYING PROBLEMS CHECK LIST Have functions been disabled by the administrator? Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS 2-SIDED COPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE Check ! Solution Does the paper type setting of the selected tray specify a type of paper that cannot be used for 2-sided copying? ■ Check "Paper Tray Settings" in the setting mode. "Settings" → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings] → [Tray Registration] → [Feeding Approved Job] Check the [Tray Settings] in the home screen.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS ROTATE COPY DOES NOT WORK Check ! Solution Did you select the copy ratio manually? ■ Use automatic ratio selection when copying. Are you copying using settings that do not allow rotate copying? ■ Rotate copying can generally be combined with other modes as required, however, some combinations are not possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check ! Solution Has an appropriate exposure mode for the original type been selected? ■ Select one of the following modes depending on the original type. (This can be set in normal mode.) • Text Use this mode for regular text documents. • Text/Printed Photo This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFF Check ! Solution Has an appropriate ratio been selected for the original size and paper size? ■ Select an appropriate ratio setting. Are you using an AB (inch) size original? ■ When copying an AB (inch) size original, specify the original size manually. COPIES COME OUT BLANK Check Is the original placed face up or face down correctly? ! Solution ■ When using the document glass, the original must be placed face down.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THIN PAPER CANNOT BE SCANNED Check Is the paper thickness applicable? ! Solution ■ Check the applicable paper thickness. THICK PAPER CANNOT BE SCANNED Check Is the paper thickness applicable? ! Solution ■ Check the applicable paper thickness.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS PRINTING PROBLEMS Have functions been disabled by the administrator? Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator. CHECK LIST ? Problem Check Page Is your PC connected correctly to the machine? 11-28 Is the machine connected to the same network (LAN, etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS ? Problem Check Page MANY GARBLED CHARACTERS ARE PRINTED Is your computer or the machine in an unstable state? 11-35 AFTER THE ROUTER WAS REPLACED, I CAN NO LONGER PRINT TO THE MACHINE Does your computer connect to the machine? 11-36 PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE Check ! Solution Is your PC connected correctly to the machine? ■ Make sure that the cable is connected securely to the LAN connector of your PC and that of the machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check ! Solution Is the machine specified correctly in the application that you are using for printing? ■ Check whether the machine's printer driver has been selected from the print window of the application. If the machine's printer driver does not appear in the list of available printer drivers, it may not be installed correctly. Remove the printer driver and then install it once again.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS I DON'T KNOW WHICH PRINTER DRIVER TO INSTALL Check Check the features of each printer driver before installing. ! Solution ■ Each printer driver has specific features. Install and use the printer drivers that match your needs. • PCL6 printer driver The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 printer control languages. Prints fast and is good for regular print jobs.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS 2-SIDED PRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE Check ! Solution Does the paper type setting of the selected tray specify a type of paper that cannot be used for 2-sided printing? ■ Check "Paper Tray Settings" in the setting mode. "Settings" → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings] → [Tray Registration] → [Feeding Approved Job] Check the [Tray Settings] in the home screen.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS A TRAY, FINISHER, OR OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICE INSTALLED ON THE MACHINE CANNOT BE USED Check Have the peripheral devices that are installed on the machine been configured with the printer driver? ! Solution ■ Open the printer properties dialog box and click [Auto Configuration] on the [Options] tab. (Windows) If auto configuration cannot be executed, see the Software Setup Guide.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS TEXT AND LINES ARE FAINT AND DIFFICULT TO SEE Check ! Solution Is the overall print density too light? ■ Use the setting below to change the overall print density. Select "Settings (Web version)" - [System Settings] → [Image Quality Adjustment] → [Print Image Quality] → [Quick Image Quality Adjustment]. Set default setting [2] to [3 (Sharp)] to increase the overall density, or [1 (Smooth)] to decrease the overall density.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFF Check ! Solution Does the paper size specified by the job match the size of paper loaded into the tray? ■ Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size of paper loaded into the tray. Windows: The setting is selected in the [Paper Source] tab of the printer driver. If [Paper Tray] is selected, check the loaded paper and the paper size setting. macOS: The setting is selected in the [Page Setup] menu.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS MANY GARBLED CHARACTERS ARE PRINTED Check Is your computer or the machine in an unstable state? ! Solution ■ Cancel printing, restart your PC and the machine, and try printing again. If there is only a small amount of free space remaining in the memory or local drive of your PC, or if a large number of jobs have been spooled on the machine and only a small amount of free space remains, text may be printed as garbled characters.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS AFTER THE ROUTER WAS REPLACED, I CAN NO LONGER PRINT TO THE MACHINE Check Does your computer connect to the machine? ! Solution ■ The network connection between the machine and your computer may not be working correctly. Check the machine's IP address and your computer's IP address, and make sure that your computer can connect to the machine. Also check if the correct "Print Port" is specified in your computer's driver settings. • Check the IP address setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS FAX PROBLEMS Have functions been disabled by the administrator? Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS ? Problem Check Page I DON'T KNOW HOW TO FORWARD RECEIVED FAXES Use the received fax forwarding settings in setting mode. 11-43 I DON'T KNOW HOW TO PREVIEW RECEIVED FAXES Enable the image preview setting for received faxes in setting mode.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check ! Solution Does the job status screen (completed jobs) or a transaction report indicate that the transmission was not successful? ■ Perform the transmission again. If the transmission is still not successful after recalling is performed as set in [Recall in Case of Line Busy] or [Recall in Case of Communication Error], the transmission failure will be indicated in the job status screen and the transaction report.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE TRANSMITTED FAX IS REDUCED BY THE RECEIVING FAX MACHINE Check Has the rotation sending been set? ! Solution ■ Enable "Rotation Sending Setting" before transmission. When [Rotation Sending Setting] is not enabled (the image is not rotated), an original placed in the vertical orientation may be reduced by the receiving machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check ! Solution Is forwarding (Inbound Routing function) enabled for a received fax? ■ If you need to print a received fax, ask your administrator. When the Inbound Routing function is enabled, received faxes are automatically forwarded to a specified address. If [Print at Error] is selected when Inbound Routing is enabled, received faxes will only be printed when an error occurs.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE MACHINE DOES NOT BEGIN FAX RECEPTION Check ! Solution Has the reception mode been set to [Manual Reception] in the setting mode? ■ Set the reception mode to [Auto Reception]. When the reception mode is set to [Manual Reception], the machine will not receive faxes automatically.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS AN ADDRESS (A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY) CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETED Check ! Solution Is the key being used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress? ■ Wait until the transmission is finished or cancel the reserved transmission and then edit or delete the key. Have functions been disabled by the administrator? ■ Check with your administrator. Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS I DON'T KNOW HOW TO PREVIEW RECEIVED FAXES Check Enable the image preview setting for received faxes in setting mode. ! Solution ■ You can forward received faxes to a forwarding destination set in advance. Enable [Received Data Image Check Setting] in "Settings (administrator)" [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings]. When a fax is received, tap the icon that appears next to the [Job Status] key at the top of the screen.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DOES NOT WORK Check Has broadcast setting been disabled in the setting mode (administrator)? ! Solution ■ Broadcast transmission cannot be performed when "Settings (administrator)" [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Send Setting] → [Disable Fax Broadcasting] is disabled.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS IMAGE SEND PROBLEMS Have functions been disabled by the administrator? Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS ? Problem Check Page AN ADDRESS (A ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEY OR GROUP KEY) CANNOT BE EDITED OR DELETED Is the key being used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress? 11-52 Has your administrator enabled a function that prevents editing/deleting? 11-52 I WANT TO CHANGE THE FORMAT OR COMPRESSION OF A SCANNED IMAGE Use the [Format] key. 11-53 I DON'T KNOW HOW TO CHECK AN ADDRESS WHEN SENDING AN IMAGE Tap the [Address Review] key.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS Check Are both direct SMTP addresses and other addresses set as destinations? ! Solution ■ Broadcast transmission to both direct SMTP addresses and other addresses is not possible. Send to direct SMTP addresses and other addresses separately.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS TRANSMISSION TAKES A LONG TIME Check Is the resolution setting appropriate at the time of scanning? ! Solution ■ Select resolution and data compression settings that are suited to the purpose of transmission.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE SCANNED IMAGE IS CLIPPED Check Is the original scan size setting smaller than the actual original size? ! Solution ■ Set the scan size to the actual original size. If you have intentionally set a smaller size than the actual original size, place the original considering the reference placement position for the selected scan size.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE SCANNED IMAGE IS BLANK Check Is the original placed face up or face down correctly? ! Solution ■ Place the original again in the correct orientation, and resend. When using the document glass, the original must be placed face down. When using the automatic document feeder, the original must be placed face up.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE FILE SIZE IS LARGE Check ! Solution Was the colour mode set to [Greyscale] when you scanned a monochrome original? ■ [Greyscale] is suitable when you want a high-quality image of text or a photo, but the file size will be larger. Using [Mono2] for a text-only original will significantly reduce the file size. This is set in Normal Mode. Is the resolution setting too high? ■ The higher the resolution setting, the larger the file size.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS I WANT TO CHANGE THE FORMAT OR COMPRESSION OF A SCANNED IMAGE Check Use the [Format] key. ! Solution ■ You can use the [Format] key to set the format and compression percentage of a file to be saved or sent. In normal mode, you can create a file of a number of original pages [Specified Pages per File] can be used. I DON'T KNOW HOW TO CHECK AN ADDRESS WHEN SENDING AN IMAGE Check Tap the [Address Review] key.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS DOCUMENT FILING PROBLEMS Have functions been disabled by the administrator? Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS A JOB CANNOT BE STORED IN A CUSTOM FOLDER Check ! Solution Do the custom folders created with the machine appear in "Folder Information"? (When printing) ■ Click the [Get Folder Name] button in the document filing save screen of the printer driver to call up the custom folders that have been created on the machine. Does the custom folder have a PIN Code? ■ Enter the PIN Code configured in the machine in the document filing save screen.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS THE PROPERTY OF A FILE CANNOT BE SET TO [Confidential] Check Is the file in the Quick File folder? ! Solution ■ Move the file to a different folder and then set its property to "Confidential". [Confidential] cannot be specified for a file in the Quick File folder. (Note that [Protect] can be specified for a file in the Quick File folder to prevent it from being easily deleted.
TROUBLESHOOTING►GENERAL PROBLEMS I DON'T KNOW HOW TO SCAN TO USB MEMORY Check ! Solution Did you insert the USB memory device? ■ When you insert a USB memory device in the machine, a message will appear. To scan to USB memory, tap the [Scan to External Memory Device] key. The external memory device screen set in Easy Scan mode appears. Place the original and tap the [Start] key to scan the document into the USB memory device.
TROUBLESHOOTING►REMOVING MISFEEDS REMOVING MISFEEDS REMOVING MISFEEDS If a paper misfeed occurs, the "Paper Jam" message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove misfeeds] key in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message will automatically disappear. • The fusing unit and paper output area are hot.
APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX►SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS Basic Specifications / Copier Specifications Name BP-70M75/BP-70M90 Type Console Color Monochrome Copier system Laser electrostatic copier Scanning resolution Scan: 600 × 600 dpi, 600 × 400 dpi, 600 × 300 dpi* Print: 1200 × 1200 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi, equivalent to 9600 dpi × 600dpi * Only when using an automatic document feeder Gradation Scan: equivalent to 256 levels Print: equivalent to 256 levels Original paper sizes Max.
APPENDIX►SPECIFICATIONS Automatic Document Feeder Document feeder types Duplex Single Pass Feeder (DSPF) Original paper sizes A3 to A6R (11" × 17" to 5-1/2" × 8-1/2"), business card Paper weight of original One-sided:35 to 220 g/m2 (9 lbs. Bond to 80 lbs. Cover)* Finisher / Saddle Stitch Finisher Name Paper sizes Useable paper No. of trays Two-sides:50 to 220 g/m2 (13 lbs. Bond to 80 lbs. Cove)* Tray capacity (60-80g/m2 (13-20 lbs. bond)) g/m2 Paper storage capacity 300 sheets (80 (20 lbs.
APPENDIX►SPECIFICATIONS Finisher (Large stacker) / Saddle Stitch Finisher (Large stacker) Name Paper sizes Useable paper No. of trays Tray capacity (80g/m2 (20 lbs. bond))*1 Max. no. of stapled sheets (80g/m2 (20 lbs. bond)) Staple position Saddle Stitch (MX-FN22) Required power supply Weight Dimensions * Punch Module Name Finisher (MX-FN21) Saddle Stitch Finisher (MX-FN22) Depends on feeder specifications Paper weight 52 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 (13 lbs. to 110 lbs.
APPENDIX►SPECIFICATIONS Inserter Network Scanner Specifications Name Inserter (MX-CF11) Useable size for inserter A3 wide (12" x 18"), A4 wide (9" x 12"), A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R Useable paper 60 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 (16 lbs. bond to 80 lbs. cover) No.
APPENDIX►SPECIFICATIONS Wireless LAN Specifications Type*1 Standard (Built-in type) Compliance standards IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac Transmission method OFDM (IEEE802.11a/g/n/ac), DS-SS (IEEE 802.11b) Frequency range 2400 to 2483.5 MHz / 5150 to 5350 MHz / 5470 to 5725 MHz / 5725 to 5850 MHz*2 Channel number See "Channels that can be used in wireless LAN". Transmission speed (value of standard) *3 IEEE802.11b max. 11 Mbps IEEE802.11a/g max. 54 Mbps IEEE802.11n max. 150 Mbps IEEE802.11ac max.
APPENDIX►SPECIFICATIONS TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and accessories. • Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 8.1, Windows Server® 2012, Windows® 10, Windows® 11, Windows Server® 2016, Windows Server® 2019, Windows Server® 2022, Internet Explorer®, Active Directory, Excel, Microsoft 365, SharePoint and OneDrive are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
LICENSE INFORMATION Information on the Software License for This Product Software composition The software included in this product is comprised of various software components whose individual copyrights are held by SHARP or by third parties.
Copyright (c) 1995 - 2008 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Export of this software from the United States of America may require a specific license from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before exporting.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version orderivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply becopied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] D3DES License --------------- Copyright (c) 1988,1989,1990,1991,1992 by Richard Outerbridge. (GEnie : OUTER; CIS : [71755,204]) Graven Imagery, 1992. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. , 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs.
library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works.
"This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations. To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------libtiff--------------------------------------------------------------------------Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
SOFTWARE LICENSE PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. 1. License The application, demonstration, system and other software accompanying this License, whether on disk, in read only memory, or on any other media (the "Software") and related documentation are licensed to you by SHARP.
6. Limited Warranty on Media. SHARP warrants the disks on which the Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. The entire liability of SHARP and/or its Licensors and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the disk which fails to meet the limited warranty provided by this Clause 6.
Version 01a / bp70m90_usr_01a_en
